]> git.ipfire.org Git - thirdparty/binutils-gdb.git/blame - ld/ld.texinfo
ld: Create test object files based on source file name
[thirdparty/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
CommitLineData
252b5132
RH
1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
6f2750fe 3@c Copyright (C) 1991-2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 4@syncodeindex ky cp
dff70155 5@c man begin INCLUDE
252b5132
RH
6@include configdoc.texi
7@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
c428fa83 8@include bfdver.texi
dff70155 9@c man end
252b5132
RH
10
11@c @smallbook
12
ff5dcc92
SC
13@macro gcctabopt{body}
14@code{\body\}
15@end macro
16
0285c67d
NC
17@c man begin NAME
18@ifset man
19@c Configure for the generation of man pages
20@set UsesEnvVars
21@set GENERIC
0285c67d 22@set ARM
ac145307 23@set C6X
49fa1e15 24@set H8300
0285c67d 25@set HPPA
0285c67d 26@set I960
0285c67d 27@set M68HC11
7fb9f789 28@set M68K
833794fc 29@set MIPS
3c3bdf30 30@set MMIX
2469cfa2 31@set MSP430
35c08157 32@set NDS32
78058a5e 33@set NIOSII
2a60a7a8
AM
34@set POWERPC
35@set POWERPC64
49fa1e15
AM
36@set Renesas
37@set SPU
38@set TICOFF
2ca22b03 39@set WIN32
e0001a05 40@set XTENSA
0285c67d
NC
41@end ifset
42@c man end
43
9160ea82
AM
44@ifnottex
45@dircategory Software development
46@direntry
252b5132 47* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
9160ea82
AM
48@end direntry
49@end ifnottex
252b5132 50
0e9517a9 51@copying
e49e529d
JM
52This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
53@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
54@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
55@end ifset
56version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 57
6f2750fe 58Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 59
cf055d54 60Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 61under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
cf055d54
NC
62or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
63with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
64Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 65section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0e9517a9 66@end copying
252b5132
RH
67@iftex
68@finalout
69@setchapternewpage odd
71ba23f6 70@settitle The GNU linker
252b5132 71@titlepage
71ba23f6 72@title The GNU linker
252b5132 73@sp 1
e49e529d
JM
74@subtitle @code{ld}
75@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
76@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
77@end ifset
252b5132
RH
78@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
79@author Steve Chamberlain
80@author Ian Lance Taylor
252b5132
RH
81@page
82
83@tex
84{\parskip=0pt
704c465c
NC
85\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
86\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
71ba23f6 87\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
252b5132
RH
88\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
89}
90\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
91@end tex
92
93@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
0285c67d 94@c man begin COPYRIGHT
6f2750fe 95Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 96
0285c67d 97Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 98under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
0285c67d
NC
99or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
100with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
101Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 102section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0285c67d 103@c man end
252b5132 104
252b5132
RH
105@end titlepage
106@end iftex
4ecceb71 107@contents
252b5132
RH
108@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
109
84ec0e6d 110@ifnottex
252b5132 111@node Top
71ba23f6 112@top LD
e49e529d
JM
113This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
114@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
115@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
116@end ifset
117version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 118
cf055d54 119This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
793c5807
NC
120Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
121in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
cf055d54 122
252b5132
RH
123@menu
124* Overview:: Overview
125* Invocation:: Invocation
126* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
127@ifset GENERIC
128* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
129@end ifset
130@ifclear GENERIC
131@ifset H8300
132* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
133@end ifset
c2dcd04e
NC
134@ifset Renesas
135* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
252b5132
RH
136@end ifset
137@ifset I960
138* i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
139@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
140@ifset ARM
141* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
142@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
143@ifset M68HC11
144* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
145@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
146@ifset HPPA
147* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
148@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
149@ifset M68K
150* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
151@end ifset
833794fc
MR
152@ifset MIPS
153* MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
154@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
155@ifset POWERPC
156* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
157@end ifset
158@ifset POWERPC64
159* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
160@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
161@ifset SPU
162* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
163@end ifset
74459f0e
TW
164@ifset TICOFF
165* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
166@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
167@ifset WIN32
168* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
169@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
170@ifset XTENSA
171* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
172@end ifset
252b5132
RH
173@end ifclear
174@ifclear SingleFormat
175* BFD:: BFD
176@end ifclear
177@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
178
179* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
180* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
704c465c 181* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
370b66a1 182* LD Index:: LD Index
252b5132 183@end menu
84ec0e6d 184@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
185
186@node Overview
187@chapter Overview
188
189@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
190@cindex what is this?
0285c67d 191
0879a67a 192@ifset man
0285c67d 193@c man begin SYNOPSIS
ff5dcc92 194ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
0285c67d
NC
195@c man end
196
197@c man begin SEEALSO
198ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
199the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
200@file{ld}.
201@c man end
202@end ifset
203
204@c man begin DESCRIPTION
205
ff5dcc92 206@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
252b5132 207their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
ff5dcc92 208compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
252b5132 209
ff5dcc92 210@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
252b5132
RH
211a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
212to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
213
0285c67d
NC
214@ifset man
215@c For the man only
ece2d90e 216This man page does not describe the command language; see the
71ba23f6
NC
217@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
218language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
0285c67d
NC
219@end ifset
220
252b5132 221@ifclear SingleFormat
ff5dcc92
SC
222This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
223to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
252b5132
RH
224write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
225@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
226available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
227@end ifclear
228
229Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
230linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
231execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
ff5dcc92 232@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
252b5132
RH
233(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
234
0285c67d
NC
235@c man end
236
252b5132
RH
237@node Invocation
238@chapter Invocation
239
0285c67d
NC
240@c man begin DESCRIPTION
241
ff5dcc92 242The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
252b5132
RH
243and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
244you have many choices to control its behavior.
245
0285c67d
NC
246@c man end
247
252b5132
RH
248@ifset UsesEnvVars
249@menu
250* Options:: Command Line Options
251* Environment:: Environment Variables
252@end menu
253
254@node Options
255@section Command Line Options
256@end ifset
257
258@cindex command line
259@cindex options
0285c67d
NC
260
261@c man begin OPTIONS
262
252b5132
RH
263The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
264practice few of them are used in any particular context.
265@cindex standard Unix system
ff5dcc92 266For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
252b5132
RH
267object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
268link a file @code{hello.o}:
269
270@smallexample
271ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
272@end smallexample
273
ff5dcc92 274This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
252b5132
RH
275result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
276the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
277directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
278
ff5dcc92 279Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
511ab9e9
ILT
280point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
281as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
282which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
283files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
284different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
252b5132
RH
285occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
286option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
287noted in the descriptions below.
288
289@cindex object files
511ab9e9
ILT
290Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
291together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
292options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
293an option and its argument.
252b5132
RH
294
295Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
296specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
297and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
298are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
299message @samp{No input files}.
300
36f63dca 301If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
252b5132
RH
302assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
303augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
304linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
305permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
306or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
53d25da6
AM
307@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
308script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
309extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
310to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
311the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
252b5132
RH
312
313For options whose names are a single letter,
314option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
315whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
316option that requires them.
317
318For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
e4897a32 319precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
36f63dca 320@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
e4897a32 321this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
ba1be17e 322only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
e4897a32
NC
323@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
324name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
325output.
326
327Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
328option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
329immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
330@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
331Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
332accepted.
252b5132 333
36f63dca
NC
334Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
335(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
fa19fce0
NC
336prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
337compiler driver) like this:
4e53152f
NC
338
339@smallexample
2509a395 340 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
4e53152f
NC
341@end smallexample
342
343This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
2509a395
SL
344silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
345may also arise when passing options that require values through a
346driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
347a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
348and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
349the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
350
351@smallexample
352 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
353@end smallexample
4e53152f
NC
354
355Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
356linker:
357
ff5dcc92 358@table @gcctabopt
38fc1cb1 359@include at-file.texi
dff70155 360
2509a395
SL
361@kindex -a @var{keyword}
362@item -a @var{keyword}
252b5132
RH
363This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
364argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
365@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
366@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
367to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
368
7ee314fa
AM
369@kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
370@item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
371Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
372@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
373specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
374will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
375finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
9d5777a3 376it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
7ee314fa 377This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
9d5777a3 378interface.
7ee314fa 379
252b5132
RH
380@ifset I960
381@cindex architectures
2509a395
SL
382@kindex -A @var{arch}
383@item -A @var{architecture}
252b5132
RH
384@kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
385@itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
ff5dcc92
SC
386In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
387Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
252b5132
RH
388@var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
389the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
ff5dcc92 390archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
252b5132
RH
391family}, for details.
392
ff5dcc92 393Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
252b5132
RH
394other architecture families.
395@end ifset
396
397@ifclear SingleFormat
398@cindex binary input format
399@kindex -b @var{format}
400@kindex --format=@var{format}
401@cindex input format
402@cindex input format
403@item -b @var{input-format}
404@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
405@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
406file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 407@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
ff5dcc92 408that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
252b5132 409configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
ff5dcc92 410to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
252b5132
RH
411default input format the most usual format on each machine.
412@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
413supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
414formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
415@xref{BFD}.
416
417You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
418binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
419linking object files of different formats), by including
420@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
a1ab1d2a 421particular format.
252b5132
RH
422
423The default format is taken from the environment variable
424@code{GNUTARGET}.
425@ifset UsesEnvVars
426@xref{Environment}.
427@end ifset
428You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
0285c67d
NC
429@code{TARGET};
430@ifclear man
431see @ref{Format Commands}.
432@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
433@end ifclear
434
435@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
436@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
437@cindex compatibility, MRI
438@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
439@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
ff5dcc92 440For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
252b5132 441files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
0285c67d
NC
442@ifclear man
443@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
444@end ifclear
445@ifset man
446the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
447@end ifset
448Introduce MRI script files with
252b5132 449the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
ff5dcc92
SC
450scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
451If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
252b5132
RH
452specified by any @samp{-L} options.
453
454@cindex common allocation
455@kindex -d
456@kindex -dc
457@kindex -dp
a1ab1d2a 458@item -d
252b5132
RH
459@itemx -dc
460@itemx -dp
461These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
462compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
463even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
464script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
465@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
466
7ee314fa
AM
467@kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
468@kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
469@item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
470@itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
471Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
472@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
473specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
474will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
475option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
9d5777a3 476The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
7ee314fa 477
252b5132
RH
478@cindex entry point, from command line
479@kindex -e @var{entry}
480@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
a1ab1d2a 481@item -e @var{entry}
252b5132
RH
482@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
483Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
484program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
485named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
486and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
487base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
488@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
489and other ways of specifying the entry point.
490
b58f81ae
DJ
491@kindex --exclude-libs
492@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
493Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
e1c37eb5 494exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
b58f81ae
DJ
495@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
496automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
497port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
498explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
499option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
500be treated as hidden.
501
e1c37eb5
DK
502@kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
503@item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
504Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
505should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
506into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
507may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
508used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
509the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
510match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
511command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
512of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
513regardless of this option.
514
252b5132
RH
515@cindex dynamic symbol table
516@kindex -E
517@kindex --export-dynamic
267e2722 518@kindex --no-export-dynamic
252b5132
RH
519@item -E
520@itemx --export-dynamic
267e2722
CD
521@itemx --no-export-dynamic
522When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
523option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
524all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
525set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
526
527If you do not use either of these options (or use the
528@option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
529dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
530referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
252b5132
RH
531
532If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
533back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
534dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
535linking the program itself.
536
55255dae 537You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
cb840a31 538be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
55255dae 539See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
cb840a31 540
8b747e1a
DK
541Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
542support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
543the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
544
36f63dca 545@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
546@cindex big-endian objects
547@cindex endianness
548@kindex -EB
549@item -EB
550Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
551
552@cindex little-endian objects
553@kindex -EL
554@item -EL
555Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
36f63dca 556@end ifclear
252b5132 557
2509a395
SL
558@kindex -f @var{name}
559@kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
560@item -f @var{name}
561@itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
562When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
563to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
564table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
565symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
566
567If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
568run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
569the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
570first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
571@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
572in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
573Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
574implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
575machine specific performance.
576
577This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
578will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
579
2509a395
SL
580@kindex -F @var{name}
581@kindex --filter=@var{name}
252b5132 582@item -F @var{name}
2509a395 583@itemx --filter=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
584When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
585the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
586of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
587on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
588
589If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
590run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
591dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
592filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
593found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
594used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
595@var{name}.
596
ff5dcc92 597Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
252b5132 598toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
36f63dca
NC
599object files.
600@ifclear SingleFormat
601The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
ece2d90e 602@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
252b5132 603@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
36f63dca
NC
604environment variable.
605@end ifclear
606The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
607creating an ELF shared object.
252b5132 608
3dbf70a2 609@cindex finalization function
2509a395
SL
610@kindex -fini=@var{name}
611@item -fini=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
612When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
613executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
614address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
615the function to call.
616
252b5132
RH
617@kindex -g
618@item -g
619Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
620
2509a395
SL
621@kindex -G @var{value}
622@kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
252b5132 623@cindex object size
2509a395 624@item -G @var{value}
252b5132
RH
625@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
626Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
627@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
e8044f35 628MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
252b5132
RH
629sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
630
631@cindex runtime library name
2509a395 632@kindex -h @var{name}
252b5132 633@kindex -soname=@var{name}
2509a395 634@item -h @var{name}
252b5132
RH
635@itemx -soname=@var{name}
636When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
637the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
638which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
639linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
640field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
641
642@kindex -i
643@cindex incremental link
644@item -i
645Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
646
3dbf70a2 647@cindex initialization function
2509a395
SL
648@kindex -init=@var{name}
649@item -init=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
650When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
651executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
652of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
653function to call.
654
252b5132 655@cindex archive files, from cmd line
2509a395 656@kindex -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf 657@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
2509a395 658@item -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf
RS
659@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
660Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
661list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
662If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
07d8eb55 663will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
bcb674cf 664will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
252b5132 665
ff5dcc92 666On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
bcb674cf
RS
667files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
668and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
669called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
670@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
671indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
672to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
673@var{filename}.
252b5132
RH
674
675The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
676specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
677was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
678command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
679archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
680the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
681
ff5dcc92 682See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
252b5132
RH
683archives multiple times.
684
685You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
686
687@ifset GENERIC
688This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
ff5dcc92 689if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
252b5132
RH
690behaviour of the AIX linker.
691@end ifset
692
693@cindex search directory, from cmd line
2509a395 694@kindex -L @var{dir}
252b5132 695@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
2509a395 696@item -L @var{searchdir}
252b5132 697@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
ff5dcc92
SC
698Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
699for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
252b5132
RH
700option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
701in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
702on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
ff5dcc92 703@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
7d24f02c
KH
704order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
705how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
706option is specified.
252b5132 707
9c8ebd6a 708If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
b3b9c41d
HPN
709by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, controlled by the @samp{--sysroot} option, or
710specified when the linker is configured.
9c8ebd6a 711
252b5132
RH
712@ifset UsesEnvVars
713The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
ff5dcc92 714@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
252b5132
RH
715some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
716@end ifset
717
718The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
719@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
720at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
721
722@cindex emulation
723@kindex -m @var{emulation}
2509a395 724@item -m @var{emulation}
252b5132
RH
725Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
726emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
727
728If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
729@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
730
731Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
732configured.
733
734@cindex link map
735@kindex -M
736@kindex --print-map
737@item -M
738@itemx --print-map
739Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
740information about the link, including the following:
741
742@itemize @bullet
743@item
3b83e13a 744Where object files are mapped into memory.
252b5132
RH
745@item
746How common symbols are allocated.
747@item
748All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
749which caused the archive member to be brought in.
3b83e13a
NC
750@item
751The values assigned to symbols.
752
753Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
754involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
755have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
756linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
757of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
758the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
759linker script containing:
760
761@smallexample
762 foo = 1
763 foo = foo * 4
764 foo = foo + 8
765@end smallexample
766
767will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
768option is used:
769
770@smallexample
771 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
772 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
773 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
774@end smallexample
775
776See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
777scripts.
252b5132
RH
778@end itemize
779
780@kindex -n
781@cindex read-only text
782@cindex NMAGIC
783@kindex --nmagic
784@item -n
785@itemx --nmagic
90f5d9d9
JZ
786Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
787libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
788mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
252b5132
RH
789
790@kindex -N
791@kindex --omagic
792@cindex read/write from cmd line
793@cindex OMAGIC
a1ab1d2a 794@item -N
252b5132
RH
795@itemx --omagic
796Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
63fd3b82
NC
797not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
798libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
4d8907ac
DS
799mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
800is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
801specification published by Microsoft.
63fd3b82
NC
802
803@kindex --no-omagic
804@cindex OMAGIC
805@item --no-omagic
806This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
807sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
808be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
809shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
252b5132
RH
810
811@kindex -o @var{output}
812@kindex --output=@var{output}
813@cindex naming the output file
814@item -o @var{output}
815@itemx --output=@var{output}
ff5dcc92 816Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
252b5132
RH
817option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
818script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
819
820@kindex -O @var{level}
821@cindex generating optimized output
822@item -O @var{level}
ff5dcc92 823If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
252b5132 824the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
98c503ac
NC
825should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
826option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
827the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
828no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
829of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
252b5132 830
26278bb8
UD
831@kindex --push-state
832@cindex push state governing input file handling
833@item --push-state
834The @option{--push-state} allows to preserve the current state of the
835flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
836restored with one corresponding @option{--pop-state} option.
837
838The option which are covered are: @option{-Bdynamic}, @option{-Bstatic},
839@option{-dn}, @option{-dy}, @option{-call_shared}, @option{-non_shared},
840@option{-static}, @option{-N}, @option{-n}, @option{--whole-archive},
841@option{--no-whole-archive}, @option{-r}, @option{-Ur},
842@option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}, @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries},
843@option{--as-needed}, @option{--no-as-needed}, and @option{-a}.
844
845One target for this option are specifications for @file{pkg-config}. When
846used with the @option{--libs} option all possibly needed libraries are
847listed and then possibly linked with all the time. It is better to return
848something as follows:
849
850@smallexample
851-Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
852@end smallexample
853
854@kindex --pop-state
855@cindex pop state governing input file handling
856Undoes the effect of --push-state, restores the previous values of the
857flags governing input file handling.
858
a712da20
NC
859@kindex -q
860@kindex --emit-relocs
861@cindex retain relocations in final executable
862@item -q
863@itemx --emit-relocs
ba1be17e 864Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
a712da20
NC
865Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
866order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
867in larger executables.
868
dbab7a7b
NC
869This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
870
4f471f39
RS
871@kindex --force-dynamic
872@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
873@item --force-dynamic
874Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
875to VxWorks targets.
876
252b5132
RH
877@cindex partial link
878@cindex relocatable output
879@kindex -r
1049f94e 880@kindex --relocatable
252b5132 881@item -r
1049f94e 882@itemx --relocatable
252b5132 883Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 884turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
252b5132
RH
885linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
886magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
887@code{OMAGIC}.
ff5dcc92 888@c ; see @option{-N}.
252b5132
RH
889If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
890linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
891constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
892
62bf86b4
HPN
893When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
894partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
895relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
896example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
897with input files in other formats at all.
898
252b5132
RH
899This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
900
901@kindex -R @var{file}
902@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
903@cindex symbol-only input
904@item -R @var{filename}
905@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
906Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
907relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
908to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
909programs. You may use this option more than once.
910
ff5dcc92 911For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 912followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 913the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
914
915@kindex -s
916@kindex --strip-all
917@cindex strip all symbols
a1ab1d2a 918@item -s
252b5132
RH
919@itemx --strip-all
920Omit all symbol information from the output file.
921
922@kindex -S
923@kindex --strip-debug
924@cindex strip debugger symbols
a1ab1d2a 925@item -S
252b5132
RH
926@itemx --strip-debug
927Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
928
929@kindex -t
930@kindex --trace
931@cindex input files, displaying
a1ab1d2a 932@item -t
252b5132 933@itemx --trace
ff5dcc92 934Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
252b5132
RH
935
936@kindex -T @var{script}
937@kindex --script=@var{script}
938@cindex script files
939@item -T @var{scriptfile}
940@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
941Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
ff5dcc92 942@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
252b5132 943@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
114283d8
NC
944output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
945the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
946specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
947options accumulate.
252b5132 948
14be8564
L
949@kindex -dT @var{script}
950@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
951@cindex script files
952@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
953@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
954Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
955
956This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
957processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
958command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
959@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
960behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
961command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
962the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
963@samp{gcc}).
964
252b5132
RH
965@kindex -u @var{symbol}
966@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
967@cindex undefined symbol
968@item -u @var{symbol}
969@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
970Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
971symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
972modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
973different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
974option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
975
0a618243
AB
976If this option is being used to force additional modules to be pulled
977into the link, and if it is an error for the symbol to remain
978undefined, then the option @option{--require-defined} should be used
979instead.
980
981@kindex --require-defined=@var{symbol}
982@cindex symbols, require defined
983@cindex defined symbol
984@item --require-defined=@var{symbol}
985Require that @var{symbol} is defined in the output file. This option
986is the same as option @option{--undefined} except that if @var{symbol}
987is not defined in the output file then the linker will issue an error
988and exit. The same effect can be achieved in a linker script by using
989@code{EXTERN}, @code{ASSERT} and @code{DEFINED} together. This option
990can be used multiple times to require additional symbols.
991
252b5132
RH
992@kindex -Ur
993@cindex constructors
a1ab1d2a 994@item -Ur
252b5132
RH
995For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
996@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 997turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
252b5132
RH
998@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
999It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
1000with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
1001be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
1002@samp{-r} for the others.
1003
c005eb9e
AB
1004@kindex --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1005@cindex orphan sections
1006@cindex sections, orphan
1007@item --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1008Control how orphan sections are handled. An orphan section is one not
1009specifically mentioned in a linker script. @xref{Orphan Sections}.
1010
1011@var{MODE} can have any of the following values:
1012
1013@table @code
1014@item place
1015Orphan sections are placed into a suitable output section following
1016the strategy described in @ref{Orphan Sections}. The option
1017@samp{--unique} also effects how sections are placed.
1018
1019@item discard
1020All orphan sections are discarded, by placing them in the
1021@samp{/DISCARD/} section (@pxref{Output Section Discarding}).
1022
1023@item warn
1024The linker will place the orphan section as for @code{place} and also
1025issue a warning.
1026
1027@item error
1028The linker will exit with an error if any orphan section is found.
1029@end table
1030
1031The default if @samp{--orphan-handling} is not given is @code{place}.
1032
577a0623
AM
1033@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1034@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1035Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
1036@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
1037missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
1038specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
1039multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
1040input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
1041in a linker script.
a854a4a7 1042
252b5132
RH
1043@kindex -v
1044@kindex -V
1045@kindex --version
1046@cindex version
1047@item -v
1048@itemx --version
1049@itemx -V
ff5dcc92 1050Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
252b5132
RH
1051lists the supported emulations.
1052
1053@kindex -x
1054@kindex --discard-all
1055@cindex deleting local symbols
1056@item -x
1057@itemx --discard-all
1058Delete all local symbols.
1059
1060@kindex -X
1061@kindex --discard-locals
1062@cindex local symbols, deleting
a1ab1d2a 1063@item -X
252b5132 1064@itemx --discard-locals
3c68c38f
BW
1065Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
1066system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
1067or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
252b5132
RH
1068
1069@kindex -y @var{symbol}
1070@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1071@cindex symbol tracing
1072@item -y @var{symbol}
1073@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1074Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1075option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1076to prepend an underscore.
1077
1078This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1079don't know where the reference is coming from.
1080
1081@kindex -Y @var{path}
1082@item -Y @var{path}
1083Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1084for Solaris compatibility.
1085
1086@kindex -z @var{keyword}
1087@item -z @var{keyword}
cd6d6c15
NC
1088The recognized keywords are:
1089@table @samp
1090
1091@item combreloc
1092Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
1093lookup caching possible.
1094
b8871f35
L
1095@item common
1096Generate common symbols with the STT_COMMON type druing a relocatable
1097link.
1098
cd6d6c15 1099@item defs
560e09e9 1100Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
07f3b6ad 1101shared libraries are still allowed.
cd6d6c15 1102
6aa29e7b
JJ
1103@item execstack
1104Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1105
b039ef04
L
1106@item global
1107This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1108the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1109of subsequently loaded libraries.
1110
cd6d6c15
NC
1111@item initfirst
1112This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1113It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1114before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1115the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1116the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1117objects.
1118
1119@item interpose
1120Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1121but the primary executable.
1122
5fa222e4
AM
1123@item lazy
1124When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1125dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1126the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1127Lazy binding is the default.
1128
cd6d6c15
NC
1129@item loadfltr
1130Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1131runtime.
1132
1133@item muldefs
1134Allows multiple definitions.
1135
1136@item nocombreloc
1137Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1138
b8871f35
L
1139@item nocommon
1140Generate common symbols with the STT_OBJECT type druing a relocatable
1141link.
1142
cd6d6c15 1143@item nocopyreloc
daf220f0
AM
1144Disable linker generated .dynbss variables used in place of variables
1145defined in shared libraries. May result in dynamic text relocations.
cd6d6c15
NC
1146
1147@item nodefaultlib
1148Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1149ignore any default library search paths.
1150
1151@item nodelete
1152Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1153
1154@item nodlopen
1155Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1156
1157@item nodump
1158Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1159
6aa29e7b
JJ
1160@item noexecstack
1161Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1162
8dfef1bd
L
1163@item text
1164Treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1165
1166@item notext
1167Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1168
1169@item textoff
1170Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1171
6aa29e7b
JJ
1172@item norelro
1173Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1174
cd6d6c15
NC
1175@item now
1176When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1177dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1178when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1179deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1180first called.
1181
1182@item origin
1183Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1184
6aa29e7b
JJ
1185@item relro
1186Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1187
24718e3b
L
1188@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1189Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1190
1191@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1192Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1193
04c3a755
NS
1194@item stack-size=@var{value}
1195Specify a stack size for in an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
1196Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1197@code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1198
d258b828
IZ
1199@item bndplt
1200Always generate BND prefix in PLT entries. Supported for Linux/x86_64.
1201
889c2a67
L
1202@item noextern-protected-data
1203Don't treat protected data symbol as external when building shared
1204library. This option overrides linker backend default. It can be used
1205to workaround incorrect relocations against protected data symbols
1206generated by compiler. Updates on protected data symbols by another
4dba69b9 1207module aren't visible to the resulting shared library. Supported for
889c2a67
L
1208i386 and x86-64.
1209
aec6b87e
L
1210@item nodynamic-undefined-weak
1211Don't treat undefined weak symbols as dynamic when building executable.
1212This option overrides linker backend default. It can be used to avoid
1213dynamic relocations against undefined weak symbols in executable.
1214Supported for i386 and x86-64.
1215
4c10bbaa
L
1216@item noreloc-overflow
1217Disable relocation overflow check. This can be used to disable
1218relocation overflow check if there will be no dynamic relocation
1219overflow at run-time. Supported for x86_64.
1220
caa65211
L
1221@item call-nop=prefix-addr
1222@itemx call-nop=prefix-nop
1223@itemx call-nop=suffix-nop
1224@itemx call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}
1225@itemx call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}
1226Specify the 1-byte @code{NOP} padding when transforming indirect call
1227to a locally defined function, foo, via its GOT slot.
1228@option{call-nop=prefix-addr} generates @code{0x67 call foo}.
1229@option{call-nop=prefix-nop} generates @code{0x90 call foo}.
1230@option{call-nop=suffix-nop} generates @code{call foo 0x90}.
1231@option{call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}} generates @code{@var{byte} call foo}.
1232@option{call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}} generates @code{call foo @var{byte}}.
1233Supported for i386 and x86_64.
1234
cd6d6c15
NC
1235@end table
1236
ece2d90e 1237Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
252b5132
RH
1238
1239@kindex -(
1240@cindex groups of archives
1241@item -( @var{archives} -)
1242@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1243The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1244either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1245
1246The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1247references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1248the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1249archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1250object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1251would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1252they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1253resolved.
1254
1255Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1256it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1257more archives.
1258
69da35b5
NC
1259@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1260@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1261@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1262@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1263Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
2ca22b03 1264recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
69da35b5
NC
1265and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1266the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1267behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1268so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1269restore the old behaviour.
2ca22b03 1270
4a43e768
AM
1271@kindex --as-needed
1272@kindex --no-as-needed
1273@item --as-needed
1274@itemx --no-as-needed
1275This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
ddbb8a31 1276on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
4a43e768
AM
1277the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1278on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
ddbb8a31 1279needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
ffa9430d
AM
1280emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1281non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1240be6b
AM
1282the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a
1283non-weak undefined symbol reference from another needed dynamic library.
ffa9430d
AM
1284Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1285the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1286needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1287from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
4a43e768 1288
e56f61be
L
1289@kindex --add-needed
1290@kindex --no-add-needed
1291@item --add-needed
1292@itemx --no-add-needed
ddbb8a31
NC
1293These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1294their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1295options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1296and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
e56f61be 1297
252b5132
RH
1298@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1299@item -assert @var{keyword}
1300This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1301
1302@kindex -Bdynamic
1303@kindex -dy
1304@kindex -call_shared
1305@item -Bdynamic
1306@itemx -dy
1307@itemx -call_shared
1308Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1309for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1310default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1311for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1312multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
da8bce14 1313@option{-l} options which follow it.
252b5132 1314
a1ab1d2a
UD
1315@kindex -Bgroup
1316@item -Bgroup
1317Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1318section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1319object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
560e09e9
NC
1320@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1321only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
a1ab1d2a 1322
252b5132
RH
1323@kindex -Bstatic
1324@kindex -dn
1325@kindex -non_shared
1326@kindex -static
a1ab1d2a 1327@item -Bstatic
252b5132
RH
1328@itemx -dn
1329@itemx -non_shared
1330@itemx -static
1331Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1332platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1333variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1334may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
560e09e9 1335library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
e9156f74
NC
1336option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1337option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1338shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1339references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
ece2d90e 1340libraries.
252b5132
RH
1341
1342@kindex -Bsymbolic
1343@item -Bsymbolic
1344When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1345definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1346for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
e20365c5
L
1347within the shared library. This option can also be used with the
1348@option{--export-dynamic} option, when creating a position independent
1349executable, to bind references to global symbols to the definition within
1350the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which
1351support shared libraries and position independent executables.
252b5132 1352
40b36307
L
1353@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1354@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1355When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
c0065db7 1356symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
e20365c5
L
1357This option can also be used with the @option{--export-dynamic} option,
1358when creating a position independent executable, to bind references
1359to global function symbols to the definition within the executable.
40b36307 1360This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
e20365c5 1361libraries and position independent executables.
40b36307 1362
55255dae
L
1363@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1364@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1365Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1366typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1367global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1368within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1369to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1370in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1371which support shared libraries.
1372
1373The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1374scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1375
40b36307
L
1376@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1377@item --dynamic-list-data
1378Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1379
1380@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1381@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1382Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1383is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1384
0b8a70d9
L
1385@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1386@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1387Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1388
252b5132
RH
1389@kindex --check-sections
1390@kindex --no-check-sections
1391@item --check-sections
308b1ffd 1392@itemx --no-check-sections
252b5132 1393Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
7d816a17 1394been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
252b5132
RH
1395perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1396suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1397allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
560e09e9 1398restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
02b0b1aa
NS
1399Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1400force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1401option.
252b5132 1402
ddbb8a31
NC
1403@kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1404@kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1405@item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1406@itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
9d5777a3 1407This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
ddbb8a31 1408by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
08efffb8 1409command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
ddbb8a31 1410output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
08efffb8 1411input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
ddbb8a31 1412specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
08efffb8
MM
1413follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1414behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
ddbb8a31
NC
1415
1416This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
08efffb8
MM
1417libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1418mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1419their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1420required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1421the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1422dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
ddbb8a31
NC
1423symbols.
1424
252b5132
RH
1425@cindex cross reference table
1426@kindex --cref
1427@item --cref
1428Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1429generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1430Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1431
1432The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1433easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1434sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1435symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
049c1c8e
NC
1436definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1437where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1438symbol are listed.
252b5132 1439
4818e05f
AM
1440@cindex common allocation
1441@kindex --no-define-common
1442@item --no-define-common
1443This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1444The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1445@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1446
1447The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1448the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1449of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1450forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1451Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1452from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1453This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1454and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1455duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1456paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1457
252b5132 1458@cindex symbols, from command line
2509a395
SL
1459@kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1460@item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
252b5132
RH
1461Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1462address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1463times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1464limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1465context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1466symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1467constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
66bc8739
AM
1468using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments}).
1469@emph{Note:} there should be no white space between @var{symbol}, the
1470equals sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{expression}.
252b5132
RH
1471
1472@cindex demangling, from command line
28c309a2 1473@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132 1474@kindex --no-demangle
28c309a2 1475@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132
RH
1476@itemx --no-demangle
1477These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1478and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1479present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1480underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
a1ab1d2a
UD
1481mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1482different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1483to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
28c309a2
NC
1484demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1485is set. These options may be used to override the default.
252b5132
RH
1486
1487@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
506eee22 1488@kindex -I@var{file}
2509a395
SL
1489@kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1490@item -I@var{file}
1491@itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
252b5132
RH
1492Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1493generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1494linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1495doing.
1496
9b8b325a
RF
1497@kindex --no-dynamic-linker
1498@item --no-dynamic-linker
1499When producing an executable file, omit the request for a dynamic
1500linker to be used at load-time. This is only meaningful for ELF
1501executables that contain dynamic relocations, and usually requires
1502entry point code that is capable of processing these relocations.
1503
7ce691ae 1504@kindex --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd 1505@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
7ce691ae 1506@item --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd
NC
1507@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1508Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1509with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
7ce691ae 1510
252b5132
RH
1511@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1512@item --force-exe-suffix
1513Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1514
1515If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1516@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1517the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1518option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1519Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1520it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1521
1522@kindex --gc-sections
1523@kindex --no-gc-sections
1524@cindex garbage collection
c17d87de
NC
1525@item --gc-sections
1526@itemx --no-gc-sections
252b5132 1527Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
ac69cbc6 1528targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
b3549761 1529performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
0f088b2a
KT
1530@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line. Note that garbage
1531collection for COFF and PE format targets is supported, but the
1532implementation is currently considered to be experimental.
252b5132 1533
d5465ba2
AM
1534@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1535examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1536symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1537command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1538referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1539libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1540referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1541the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1542relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1543
ac69cbc6 1544This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
9d5777a3 1545@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
ac69cbc6
TG
1546specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1547a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1548
c17d87de
NC
1549@kindex --print-gc-sections
1550@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1551@cindex garbage collection
1552@item --print-gc-sections
1553@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1554List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1555printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1556collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1557default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1558be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1559line.
1560
30824704
RM
1561@kindex --print-output-format
1562@cindex output format
1563@item --print-output-format
1564Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1565other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1566in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1567
3604cb1f
TG
1568@kindex --print-memory-usage
1569@cindex memory usage
1570@item --print-memory-usage
1571Print used size, total size and used size of memory regions created with
1572the @ref{MEMORY} command. This is useful on embedded targets to have a
1573quick view of amount of free memory. The format of the output has one
1574headline and one line per region. It is both human readable and easily
1575parsable by tools. Here is an example of an output:
1576
1577@smallexample
1578Memory region Used Size Region Size %age Used
1579 ROM: 256 KB 1 MB 25.00%
1580 RAM: 32 B 2 GB 0.00%
1581@end smallexample
1582
252b5132
RH
1583@cindex help
1584@cindex usage
1585@kindex --help
1586@item --help
1587Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1588
ea20a7da
CC
1589@kindex --target-help
1590@item --target-help
1591Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1592
2509a395
SL
1593@kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1594@item -Map=@var{mapfile}
252b5132 1595Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
560e09e9 1596@option{-M} option, above.
252b5132
RH
1597
1598@cindex memory usage
1599@kindex --no-keep-memory
1600@item --no-keep-memory
ff5dcc92
SC
1601@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1602symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
252b5132 1603instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
ff5dcc92 1604necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
252b5132
RH
1605while linking a large executable.
1606
1607@kindex --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1608@kindex -z defs
252b5132 1609@item --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1610@itemx -z defs
560e09e9
NC
1611Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1612is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1613The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1614behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
ece2d90e 1615libraries being linked in.
252b5132 1616
aa713662
L
1617@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1618@kindex -z muldefs
1619@item --allow-multiple-definition
1620@itemx -z muldefs
1621Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1622report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1623first definition will be used.
1624
b79e8c78 1625@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1626@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
b79e8c78 1627@item --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1628@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
903249d7 1629Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
560e09e9
NC
1630This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1631determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1632shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1633how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1634
903249d7
NC
1635The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1636referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1637an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1638a shared library.
1639
1640The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1641libraries specified at link time are that:
1642
1643@itemize @bullet
1644@item
1645A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1646that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1647resolvable at load time.
1648@item
1649There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1650symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1651
1652The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1653select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1654architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1655appropriate memset function.
1656@end itemize
b79e8c78 1657
31941635
L
1658@kindex --no-undefined-version
1659@item --no-undefined-version
1660Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1661it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1662will be issued instead.
1663
3e3b46e5
PB
1664@kindex --default-symver
1665@item --default-symver
1666Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
fc0e6df6
PB
1667exported symbols.
1668
1669@kindex --default-imported-symver
1670@item --default-imported-symver
1671Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1672imported symbols.
3e3b46e5 1673
252b5132
RH
1674@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1675@item --no-warn-mismatch
ff5dcc92 1676Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
252b5132
RH
1677files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1678been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
ff5dcc92 1679This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
252b5132
RH
1680errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1681have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1682inappropriate.
1683
fe7929ce
AM
1684@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1685@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1686Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1687library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1688
252b5132
RH
1689@kindex --no-whole-archive
1690@item --no-whole-archive
ff5dcc92 1691Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
252b5132
RH
1692archive files.
1693
1694@cindex output file after errors
1695@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1696@item --noinhibit-exec
1697Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1698Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1699errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1700when it issues any error whatsoever.
1701
0a9c1c8e
CD
1702@kindex -nostdlib
1703@item -nostdlib
1704Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1705command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1706(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1707
252b5132 1708@ifclear SingleFormat
2509a395
SL
1709@kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1710@item --oformat=@var{output-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
1711@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1712file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 1713@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
ff5dcc92
SC
1714object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1715object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
1716should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1717usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1718name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1719list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1720command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1721this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1722@end ifclear
1723
76359541
TP
1724@kindex --out-implib
1725@item --out-implib @var{file}
1726Create an import library in @var{file} corresponding to the executable
1727the linker is generating (eg. a DLL or ELF program). This import
1728library (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a} for DLLs)
1729may be used to link clients against the generated executable; this
1730behaviour makes it possible to skip a separate import library creation
1731step (eg. @code{dlltool} for DLLs). This option is only available for
1732the i386 PE and ELF targetted ports of the linker.
1733
36af4a4e
JJ
1734@kindex -pie
1735@kindex --pic-executable
1736@item -pie
1737@itemx --pic-executable
1738@cindex position independent executables
1739Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1740ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1741libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
7e7d5768 1742address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
36af4a4e
JJ
1743normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1744defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1745
252b5132
RH
1746@kindex -qmagic
1747@item -qmagic
1748This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1749
1750@kindex -Qy
1751@item -Qy
1752This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1753
1754@kindex --relax
1755@cindex synthesizing linker
1756@cindex relaxing addressing modes
28d5f677 1757@cindex --no-relax
252b5132 1758@item --relax
28d5f677 1759@itemx --no-relax
a1ab1d2a 1760An option with machine dependent effects.
252b5132
RH
1761@ifset GENERIC
1762This option is only supported on a few targets.
1763@end ifset
1764@ifset H8300
ff5dcc92 1765@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
252b5132
RH
1766@end ifset
1767@ifset I960
ff5dcc92 1768@xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
252b5132 1769@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
1770@ifset XTENSA
1771@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1772@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
1773@ifset M68HC11
1774@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1775@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
1776@ifset NIOSII
1777@xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1778@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
1779@ifset POWERPC
1780@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1781@end ifset
252b5132 1782
28d5f677
NC
1783On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1784global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1785addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1786synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
11e7fd74 1787instructions, and combining constant values.
252b5132
RH
1788
1789On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1790debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1791@ifset GENERIC
28d5f677
NC
1792This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1793family of processors.
252b5132
RH
1794@end ifset
1795
1796@ifset GENERIC
1797On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1798but ignored.
1799@end ifset
1800
28d5f677
NC
1801On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1802@samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1803
252b5132
RH
1804@cindex retaining specified symbols
1805@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1806@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
2509a395
SL
1807@kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1808@item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
252b5132
RH
1809Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1810discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1811symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1812@ifset GENERIC
1813(such as VxWorks)
1814@end ifset
1815where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1816run-time memory.
1817
1818@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1819or symbols needed for relocations.
1820
1821You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1822line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1823
1824@ifset GENERIC
2509a395 1825@item -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1826@cindex runtime library search path
2509a395 1827@kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1828Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
ff5dcc92 1829linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
252b5132 1830arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
ff5dcc92 1831them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
252b5132
RH
1832also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1833objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
ff5dcc92 1834@option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
252b5132
RH
1835ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1836@code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1837
ff5dcc92 1838The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
d8506323 1839SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search path out of all the
ff5dcc92
SC
1840@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1841runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1842options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1843gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
b45619c0 1844file systems.
252b5132 1845
ff5dcc92 1846For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 1847followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 1848the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
1849@end ifset
1850
1851@ifset GENERIC
1852@cindex link-time runtime library search path
2509a395
SL
1853@kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1854@item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
252b5132
RH
1855When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1856happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1857of the input files.
1858
1859When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1860non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1861shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
ff5dcc92 1862explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
252b5132 1863specifies the first set of directories to search. The
ff5dcc92 1864@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
252b5132
RH
1865either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1866appearing multiple times.
1867
28c309a2
NC
1868This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1869that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1870is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1871runtime linker would do.
1872
252b5132 1873The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
ece2d90e 1874libraries:
252b5132
RH
1875@enumerate
1876@item
ff5dcc92 1877Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
252b5132 1878@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1879Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1880between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1881specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1882used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
ece2d90e
NC
1883at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1884by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1885the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
252b5132 1886@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1887On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1888@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1889environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
252b5132 1890@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1891On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1892directories specified using @option{-L} options.
252b5132 1893@item
a1b8d843 1894For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
e2a83dd0 1895variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
252b5132 1896@item
ec4eb78a
L
1897For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1898@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1899libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1900@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1901@item
252b5132
RH
1902The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1903@item
1904For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1905exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1906@end enumerate
1907
1908If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1909warning and continue with the link.
1910@end ifset
1911
1912@kindex -shared
1913@kindex -Bshareable
1914@item -shared
1915@itemx -Bshareable
1916@cindex shared libraries
1917Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1918and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
ff5dcc92 1919shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
252b5132
RH
1920undefined symbols in the link.
1921
252b5132 1922@kindex --sort-common
2509a395
SL
1923@item --sort-common
1924@itemx --sort-common=ascending
1925@itemx --sort-common=descending
de7dd2bd
NC
1926This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1927ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1928sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1929eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1930between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
1931specified, then descending order is assumed.
252b5132 1932
2509a395
SL
1933@kindex --sort-section=name
1934@item --sort-section=name
bcaa7b3e
L
1935This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1936patterns in the linker script.
1937
2509a395
SL
1938@kindex --sort-section=alignment
1939@item --sort-section=alignment
bcaa7b3e
L
1940This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1941patterns in the linker script.
1942
252b5132 1943@kindex --split-by-file
2509a395 1944@item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
ff5dcc92 1945Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
a854a4a7
AM
1946each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
1947size of 1 if not given.
252b5132
RH
1948
1949@kindex --split-by-reloc
2509a395 1950@item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
a854a4a7 1951Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
252b5132 1952output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
a854a4a7 1953This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
252b5132
RH
1954certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
1955cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
1956that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
1957support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
1958input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
1959more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
a854a4a7 1960many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
252b5132
RH
1961
1962@kindex --stats
1963@item --stats
1964Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
1965as execution time and memory usage.
1966
2509a395 1967@kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
e2243057
RS
1968@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
1969Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
1970configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
1971that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
1972
252b5132
RH
1973@kindex --traditional-format
1974@cindex traditional format
1975@item --traditional-format
ff5dcc92
SC
1976For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
1977the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
252b5132
RH
1978use the traditional format instead.
1979
1980@cindex dbx
ff5dcc92 1981For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
252b5132
RH
1982symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
1983full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
1984@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
ff5dcc92 1985trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
252b5132
RH
1986combine duplicate entries.
1987
2509a395
SL
1988@kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1989@item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
176355da
NC
1990Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
1991address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
1992times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
1993line.
1994@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
1995for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
1996@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
1997should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
1998sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
1999
2509a395
SL
2000@kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
2001@kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
2002@kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
252b5132 2003@cindex segment origins, cmd line
2509a395
SL
2004@item -Tbss=@var{org}
2005@itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
2006@itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
2007Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
a6e02871 2008@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
252b5132 2009
2509a395
SL
2010@kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2011@item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
258795f5 2012@cindex text segment origin, cmd line
2b8c06a3
L
2013When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
2014byte of the text segment.
258795f5 2015
9d5777a3
RM
2016@kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2017@item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2018@cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
2019When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
2020the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
2021text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
2022
0d705e9f
AM
2023@kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2024@item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2025@cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
2026When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
2027model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
2028
560e09e9
NC
2029@kindex --unresolved-symbols
2030@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
2031Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
2032values for @samp{method}:
2033
2034@table @samp
2035@item ignore-all
da8bce14 2036Do not report any unresolved symbols.
560e09e9
NC
2037
2038@item report-all
da8bce14 2039Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
560e09e9
NC
2040
2041@item ignore-in-object-files
2042Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
2043ignore them if they come from regular object files.
2044
2045@item ignore-in-shared-libs
2046Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
2047ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
2048when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
2049libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
2050command line.
2051@end table
2052
2053The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
2054by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
2055
2056Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
2057unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
2058can change this to a warning.
2059
1715a13c
L
2060@kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2061@cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
252b5132 2062@item --dll-verbose
1715a13c 2063@itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
ff5dcc92 2064Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
252b5132 2065supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
1715a13c
L
2066the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
2067argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
252b5132
RH
2068
2069@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2070@cindex version script, symbol versions
2509a395 2071@item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
252b5132
RH
2072Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
2073used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
36f63dca 2074about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
09e2aba4
DK
2075is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
2076see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
2077use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
2078symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
2079@xref{WIN32}.
252b5132 2080
7ce691ae 2081@kindex --warn-common
252b5132
RH
2082@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
2083@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
2084@item --warn-common
2085Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
11e7fd74 2086a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
252b5132
RH
2087but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
2088you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
11e7fd74 2089Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
252b5132
RH
2090warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
2091
2092There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
2093
2094@table @samp
2095@item int i = 1;
2096A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
2097file.
2098
2099@item extern int i;
2100An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
2101There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
2102variable somewhere.
2103
2104@item int i;
2105A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
2106variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
2107The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
2108single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
2109size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
2110a definition of the same variable.
2111@end table
2112
2113The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
2114Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
2115just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
2116encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
2117a common symbol.
2118
2119@enumerate
2120@item
2121Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
2122definition for the symbol.
2123@smallexample
2124@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2125 overridden by definition
2126@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
2127@end smallexample
2128
2129@item
2130Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
2131the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
2132except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
2133@smallexample
2134@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
2135 overriding common
2136@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
2137@end smallexample
2138
2139@item
2140Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
2141@smallexample
2142@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
2143 of `@var{symbol}'
2144@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
2145@end smallexample
2146
2147@item
2148Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
2149@smallexample
2150@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2151 overridden by larger common
2152@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
2153@end smallexample
2154
2155@item
2156Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
2157the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
2158encountered in a different order.
2159@smallexample
2160@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2161 overriding smaller common
2162@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
2163@end smallexample
2164@end enumerate
2165
2166@kindex --warn-constructors
2167@item --warn-constructors
2168Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2169object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2170detect the use of global constructors.
2171
2172@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2173@item --warn-multiple-gp
2174Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2175This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2176Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2177section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2178of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2179base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2180base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2181bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2182large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2183values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2184option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2185
2186@kindex --warn-once
2187@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2188@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2189@item --warn-once
2190Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2191which refers to it.
2192
2193@kindex --warn-section-align
2194@cindex warnings, on section alignment
2195@cindex section alignment, warnings on
2196@item --warn-section-align
2197Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2198alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2199The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2200is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2201the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2202
8fdd7217
NC
2203@kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2204@item --warn-shared-textrel
ece2d90e 2205Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
8fdd7217 2206
a0c402a5
L
2207@kindex --warn-alternate-em
2208@item --warn-alternate-em
2209Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2210
560e09e9
NC
2211@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2212@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2213If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2214@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2215This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2216
2217@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2218@item --error-unresolved-symbols
2219This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2220it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2221
252b5132
RH
2222@kindex --whole-archive
2223@cindex including an entire archive
2224@item --whole-archive
2225For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
ff5dcc92 2226@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
252b5132
RH
2227in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2228files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2229library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2230library. This option may be used more than once.
2231
7ec229ce 2232Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
ff5dcc92
SC
2233about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2234Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
7ec229ce
DD
2235list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2236your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2237
2509a395
SL
2238@kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2239@item --wrap=@var{symbol}
252b5132
RH
2240Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2241@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2242undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2243@var{symbol}.
2244
2245This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2246wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2247wishes to call the system function, it should call
2248@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2249
2250Here is a trivial example:
2251
2252@smallexample
2253void *
cc2f008e 2254__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
252b5132 2255@{
cc2f008e 2256 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
252b5132
RH
2257 return __real_malloc (c);
2258@}
2259@end smallexample
2260
ff5dcc92 2261If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
252b5132
RH
2262all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2263instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2264call the real @code{malloc} function.
2265
2266You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
ff5dcc92 2267links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
252b5132
RH
2268you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2269file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2270call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2271
6aa29e7b 2272@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
29063f8b 2273@kindex --no-eh-frame-hdr
6aa29e7b 2274@item --eh-frame-hdr
29063f8b
NC
2275@itemx --no-eh-frame-hdr
2276Request (@option{--eh-frame-hdr}) or suppress
2277(@option{--no-eh-frame-hdr}) the creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr}
2278section and ELF @code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
6aa29e7b 2279
e41b3a13
JJ
2280@kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2281@item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2282Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2283generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2284if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2285
6c1439be
L
2286@kindex --enable-new-dtags
2287@kindex --disable-new-dtags
2288@item --enable-new-dtags
2289@itemx --disable-new-dtags
2290This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2291systems may not understand them. If you specify
b1b00fcc
MF
2292@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2293and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
ff5dcc92 2294If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
6c1439be
L
2295created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2296those options are only available for ELF systems.
2297
2d643429 2298@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
e185dd51 2299@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2d643429
NC
2300Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2301close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2302time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2303increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2304value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2305
fdc90cb4
JJ
2306@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2307@item --hash-style=@var{style}
2308Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2309@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2310new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2311the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2312hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2313
0ce398f1
L
2314@kindex --compress-debug-sections=none
2315@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2316@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2317@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2318@item --compress-debug-sections=none
2319@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2320@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2321@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2322On ELF platforms , these options control how DWARF debug sections are
2323compressed using zlib. @option{--compress-debug-sections=none} doesn't
19a7fe52
L
2324compress DWARF debug sections.
2325@option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses DWARF debug
0ce398f1 2326sections and rename debug section names to begin with @samp{.zdebug}
19a7fe52
L
2327instead of @samp{.debug}. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib}
2328and @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}
2329compress DWARF debug sections with SHF_COMPRESSED from the ELF ABI.
6c3bc0f8
NC
2330The default behaviour varies depending upon the target involved and
2331the configure options used to build the toolchain. The default can be
2332determined by examing the output from the linker's @option{--help} option.
0ce398f1 2333
35835446
JR
2334@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2335@item --reduce-memory-overheads
2336This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
f2a8f148 2337linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
35835446 2338for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2d643429
NC
2339about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2340
4f9c04f7 2341Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2d643429 23421021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
a85785bc 2343run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2d643429
NC
2344has been used.
2345
2346The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2347enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
35835446 2348
c0065db7
RM
2349@kindex --build-id
2350@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2351@item --build-id
2352@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
61e2488c 2353Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
6033bf41 2354or a @code{.buildid} COFF section. The contents of the note are
61e2488c
JT
2355unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2356@code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2357@sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2358@code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2359the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2360string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2361@code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2362is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
24382dca
RM
2363
2364The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2365that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2366unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2367to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2368file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2369string identifying the original linked file does not change.
c0065db7
RM
2370
2371Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2372@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
252b5132
RH
2373@end table
2374
0285c67d
NC
2375@c man end
2376
36f63dca 2377@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
252b5132 2378
0285c67d
NC
2379@c man begin OPTIONS
2380
ff5dcc92 2381The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
252b5132
RH
2382the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2383normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2384use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2385@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2386like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2387symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2388object file).
2389
2390In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2391support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2392PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2393values by either a space or an equals sign.
2394
ff5dcc92 2395@table @gcctabopt
252b5132
RH
2396
2397@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2398@item --add-stdcall-alias
2399If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2400as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
bb10df36 2401[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2402
2403@kindex --base-file
2404@item --base-file @var{file}
2405Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2406addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2407@file{dlltool}.
bb10df36 2408[This is an i386 PE specific option]
252b5132
RH
2409
2410@kindex --dll
2411@item --dll
2412Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
ff5dcc92 2413@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
252b5132 2414file.
bb10df36 2415[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2416
88183869
DK
2417@kindex --enable-long-section-names
2418@kindex --disable-long-section-names
2419@item --enable-long-section-names
2420@itemx --disable-long-section-names
56e6cf80 2421The PE variants of the COFF object format add an extension that permits
88183869 2422the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
56e6cf80
NC
2423for COFF. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2424fully-linked executable images do not carry the COFF string table required
88183869
DK
2425to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2426allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2427disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2428generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2429as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
9d5777a3
RM
2430with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2431GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
3efd345c
DK
2432information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2433option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2434section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2435when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2436image and not stripping symbols.
88183869
DK
2437[This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2438
252b5132
RH
2439@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2440@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2441@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2442@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2443If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
36f63dca 2444do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
252b5132
RH
2445only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2446resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2447undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2448@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2449to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2450warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2451import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
ff5dcc92 2452to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
252b5132 2453feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
ff5dcc92 2454@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
252b5132 2455mismatches are considered to be errors.
bb10df36 2456[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2457
522f09cd
KT
2458@kindex --leading-underscore
2459@kindex --no-leading-underscore
2460@item --leading-underscore
2461@itemx --no-leading-underscore
2462For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2463in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2464disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2465
252b5132
RH
2466@cindex DLLs, creating
2467@kindex --export-all-symbols
2468@item --export-all-symbols
2469If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2470be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2471otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2472explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2473attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2474option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
ece2d90e 2475@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
b044cda1 2476@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
ece2d90e
NC
2477exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2478re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2479such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2480@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
b044cda1
CW
2481@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2482Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2483not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
ece2d90e 2484extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
b044cda1 2485(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
ece2d90e 2486These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
b044cda1 2487@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
ece2d90e 2488@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
b044cda1 2489@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
ece2d90e 2490@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
bb10df36 2491[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2492
2493@kindex --exclude-symbols
1d0a3c9c 2494@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
252b5132
RH
2495Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2496exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
bb10df36 2497[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2498
2927aaca
NC
2499@kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2500@item --exclude-all-symbols
2501Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2502[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2503
252b5132
RH
2504@kindex --file-alignment
2505@item --file-alignment
2506Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2507file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2508512.
bb10df36 2509[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2510
2511@cindex heap size
2512@kindex --heap
2513@item --heap @var{reserve}
2514@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2515Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2516to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2517committed.
bb10df36 2518[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2519
2520@cindex image base
2521@kindex --image-base
2522@item --image-base @var{value}
2523Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2524the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2525is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2526your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2527other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2528for dlls.
bb10df36 2529[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2530
2531@kindex --kill-at
2532@item --kill-at
2533If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2534symbols before they are exported.
bb10df36 2535[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2536
26d2d8a2
BF
2537@kindex --large-address-aware
2538@item --large-address-aware
b45619c0 2539If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
26d2d8a2 2540header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
b45619c0 2541greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
26d2d8a2
BF
2542or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2543section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2544[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2545
f69a2f97
NC
2546@kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2547@item --disable-large-address-aware
2548Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2549This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2550driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2551addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2552[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2553
252b5132
RH
2554@kindex --major-image-version
2555@item --major-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2556Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
bb10df36 2557[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2558
2559@kindex --major-os-version
2560@item --major-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2561Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2562[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2563
2564@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2565@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2566Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2567[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2568
2569@kindex --minor-image-version
2570@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2571Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2572[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2573
2574@kindex --minor-os-version
2575@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2576Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2577[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2578
2579@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2580@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2581Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2582[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2583
2584@cindex DEF files, creating
2585@cindex DLLs, creating
2586@kindex --output-def
2587@item --output-def @var{file}
2588The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2589file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2590(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2591library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2592automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
bb10df36 2593[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2594
b044cda1 2595@cindex DLLs, creating
b044cda1
CW
2596@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2597@item --enable-auto-image-base
d0e6d77b
CF
2598@itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2599Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2600@var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2601By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2602for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2603execution are avoided.
bb10df36 2604[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2605
2606@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2607@item --disable-auto-image-base
2608Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2609user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2610default.
bb10df36 2611[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2612
2613@cindex DLLs, linking to
2614@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2615@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
489d0400 2616When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
ece2d90e 2617search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
560e09e9 2618@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
b044cda1
CW
2619between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2620uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
ece2d90e 2621@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
bb10df36 2622[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2623
2624@kindex --enable-auto-import
2625@item --enable-auto-import
ece2d90e
NC
2626Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2627DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
4d8907ac
DS
2628building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2629'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2630to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2631specification published by Microsoft.
2632
e2a83dd0
NC
2633Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2634data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2635placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2636around a problem with consts that is described here:
2637http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2638
4d8907ac
DS
2639Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2640see this message:
0d888aac 2641
ece2d90e 2642"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
0d888aac
CW
2643documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2644
ece2d90e
NC
2645This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2646ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
c0065db7
RM
2647allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2648fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2649constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2f8d8971
NC
2650multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2651this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2652of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2653the warning, and exit.
2654
2655There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2656data type of the exported variable:
0d888aac 2657
2fa9fc65
NC
2658One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2659of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
560e09e9 2660this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2fa9fc65 2661
c0065db7
RM
2662A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2663that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2664there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
0d888aac
CW
2665a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2666
2667@example
2668extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2669extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2670 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2671@end example
2672
2673or
2674
2675@example
2676extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2677extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2678 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2679@end example
2680
c0065db7 2681For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2f8d8971 2682is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
0d888aac
CW
2683
2684@example
2685extern struct s extern_struct;
c0065db7 2686extern_struct.field -->
0d888aac
CW
2687 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2688@end example
2689
c406afaf
NC
2690or
2691
2692@example
2693extern long long extern_ll;
2694extern_ll -->
2695 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2696@end example
2697
2fa9fc65 2698A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
c0065db7 2699'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
11e7fd74 2700@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
0d888aac 2701requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
c0065db7
RM
2702building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2703merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2704between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
0d888aac
CW
2705constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2706
2707Original:
2708@example
2709--foo.h
2710extern int arr[];
2711--foo.c
2712#include "foo.h"
2713void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2714 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2715@}
2716@end example
2717
2718Solution 1:
2719@example
2720--foo.h
2721extern int arr[];
2722--foo.c
2723#include "foo.h"
2724void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2725 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2726 volatile int *parr = arr;
2727 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2728@}
2729@end example
2730
2731Solution 2:
2732@example
2733--foo.h
2734/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2735#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2736 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2737#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2738#else
2739#define FOO_IMPORT
2740#endif
2741extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2742--foo.c
2743#include "foo.h"
2744void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2745 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2746@}
2747@end example
2748
c0065db7 2749A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
0d888aac
CW
2750library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2751for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2752functions).
bb10df36 2753[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2754
2755@kindex --disable-auto-import
2756@item --disable-auto-import
c0065db7 2757Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
b044cda1 2758@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2759[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2760
2fa9fc65
NC
2761@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2762@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2763If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2764that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2765a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
c0065db7 2766environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
bb10df36 2767[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65
NC
2768
2769@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2770@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2771Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
676ee43b 2772DLLs.
bb10df36 2773[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65 2774
b044cda1
CW
2775@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2776@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2777Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
bb10df36 2778[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2779
252b5132
RH
2780@kindex --section-alignment
2781@item --section-alignment
2782Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2783addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
bb10df36 2784[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2785
2786@cindex stack size
2787@kindex --stack
2788@item --stack @var{reserve}
2789@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2790Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2791to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2792committed.
bb10df36 2793[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2794
2795@kindex --subsystem
2796@item --subsystem @var{which}
2797@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2798@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2799Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2800legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
33f362e1
NC
2801@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2802the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2803@var{which}.
bb10df36 2804[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2805
2f563b51
DK
2806The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2807of the PE file header:
2808[These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2809
2d5c3743
NC
2810@kindex --high-entropy-va
2811@item --high-entropy-va
2812Image is compatible with 64-bit address space layout randomization
2813(ASLR).
2814
2f563b51
DK
2815@kindex --dynamicbase
2816@item --dynamicbase
2817The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2818randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2819Vista for i386 PE targets.
2820
2821@kindex --forceinteg
2822@item --forceinteg
2823Code integrity checks are enforced.
2824
2825@kindex --nxcompat
2826@item --nxcompat
2827The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2828This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2829
2830@kindex --no-isolation
2831@item --no-isolation
2832Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2833
2834@kindex --no-seh
2835@item --no-seh
2836The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2837this image.
2838
2839@kindex --no-bind
2840@item --no-bind
2841Do not bind this image.
2842
2843@kindex --wdmdriver
2844@item --wdmdriver
2845The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
9d5777a3 2846
2f563b51
DK
2847@kindex --tsaware
2848@item --tsaware
2849The image is Terminal Server aware.
2850
0cb112f7
CF
2851@kindex --insert-timestamp
2852@item --insert-timestamp
eeb14e5a
LZ
2853@itemx --no-insert-timestamp
2854Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default behaviour
2855as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
2856other, proprietary tools. The problem with this default is that it
56e6cf80 2857will result in slightly different images being produced each time the
eeb14e5a
LZ
2858same sources are linked. The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
2859can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
56e6cf80 2860that binaries produced from identical sources will compare
eeb14e5a 2861identically.
252b5132
RH
2862@end table
2863
0285c67d
NC
2864@c man end
2865
ac145307
BS
2866@ifset C6X
2867@subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
2868
2869@c man begin OPTIONS
2870
2871The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
2872libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
2873all executables use an index of 0.
2874
2875@table @gcctabopt
2876
2877@kindex --dsbt-size
2878@item --dsbt-size @var{size}
56e6cf80 2879This option sets the number of entries in the DSBT of the current executable
ac145307
BS
2880or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
2881entries.
2882
2883@kindex --dsbt-index
2884@item --dsbt-index @var{index}
2885This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
2886to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
2887executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
2888@code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
2889
fbd9ad90
PB
2890@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
2891The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
2892exidx entries in frame unwind info.
2893
ac145307
BS
2894@end table
2895
2896@c man end
2897@end ifset
2898
93fd0973
SC
2899@ifset M68HC11
2900@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2901
2902@c man begin OPTIONS
2903
2904The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2905memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2906
2907@table @gcctabopt
2908
2909@kindex --no-trampoline
2910@item --no-trampoline
2911This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2912is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2913instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2914
2915@kindex --bank-window
2916@item --bank-window @var{name}
2917This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2918the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2919The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
2920paging and addresses within the memory window.
2921
2922@end table
2923
2924@c man end
2925@end ifset
2926
7fb9f789
NC
2927@ifset M68K
2928@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2929
2930@c man begin OPTIONS
2931
2932The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
2933when linking for 68K targets.
2934
2935@table @gcctabopt
2936
2937@kindex --got
2938@item --got=@var{type}
2939This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2940@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
2941@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
2942Info entry for @file{ld}.
2943
2944@end table
2945
2946@c man end
2947@end ifset
2948
833794fc
MR
2949@ifset MIPS
2950@subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
2951
2952@c man begin OPTIONS
2953
2954The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
2955generation when linking for MIPS targets.
2956
2957@table @gcctabopt
2958
2959@kindex --insn32
2960@item --insn32
2961@kindex --no-insn32
2962@itemx --no-insn32
2963These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
2964generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
2965or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
296632-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
2967used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
2968possible.
2969
2970@end table
2971
2972@c man end
2973@end ifset
2974
252b5132
RH
2975@ifset UsesEnvVars
2976@node Environment
2977@section Environment Variables
2978
0285c67d
NC
2979@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
2980
560e09e9 2981You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
36f63dca
NC
2982@ifclear SingleFormat
2983@code{GNUTARGET},
2984@end ifclear
2985@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
252b5132 2986
36f63dca 2987@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
2988@kindex GNUTARGET
2989@cindex default input format
2990@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
2991use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
2992of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
ff5dcc92 2993@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
252b5132
RH
2994of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
2995attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
2996this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
2997there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
2998object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
2999BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
3000in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
36f63dca 3001@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
3002
3003@kindex LDEMULATION
3004@cindex default emulation
3005@cindex emulation, default
3006@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
3007@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
3008behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
3009available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
3010the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
3011variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
3012linker was configured.
252b5132
RH
3013
3014@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
3015@cindex demangling, default
3016Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
3017@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
3018default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
3019a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
3020may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
3021options.
3022
0285c67d
NC
3023@c man end
3024@end ifset
3025
252b5132
RH
3026@node Scripts
3027@chapter Linker Scripts
3028
3029@cindex scripts
3030@cindex linker scripts
3031@cindex command files
3032Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
3033written in the linker command language.
3034
3035The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
3036the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
3037the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
3038more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
3039direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
3040described below.
3041
3042The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
3043yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
3044linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
3045to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
3046such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
3047
3048You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
3049line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
3050default linker script.
3051
3052You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
3053to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
3054Linker Scripts}.
3055
3056@menu
3057* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
3058* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
3059* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
3060* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
3061* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
3062* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
3063* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
3064* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
3065* VERSION:: VERSION Command
3066* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
3067* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
3068@end menu
3069
3070@node Basic Script Concepts
3071@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
3072@cindex linker script concepts
3073We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
3074describe the linker script language.
3075
3076The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
3077file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
3078@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
3079The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
3080purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
3081among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
3082section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
3083in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
3084
3085Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
3086also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
56dd11f0 3087contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
252b5132
RH
3088the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
3089A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
3090area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
3091loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
3092which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
3093of debugging information.
3094
3095Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
3096first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
3097the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
3098@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
3099section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
3100same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
3101is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
3102(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
3103based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
3104RAM address would be the VMA.
3105
3106You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
3107program with the @samp{-h} option.
3108
3109Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
3110@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
3111has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
3112information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
3113will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
3114static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
3115referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
3116
3117You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
3118program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
3119option.
3120
3121@node Script Format
3122@section Linker Script Format
3123@cindex linker script format
3124Linker scripts are text files.
3125
3126You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
3127either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
3128symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
3129generally ignored.
3130
3131Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
3132If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
3133otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
3134double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
3135file name.
3136
3137You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
3138@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
3139to whitespace.
3140
3141@node Simple Example
3142@section Simple Linker Script Example
3143@cindex linker script example
3144@cindex example of linker script
3145Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
3146
3147The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
3148@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
3149memory layout of the output file.
3150
3151The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
3152describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
3153code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
3154@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
3155Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
3156your input files.
3157
3158For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
31590x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
3160linker script which will do that:
3161@smallexample
3162SECTIONS
3163@{
3164 . = 0x10000;
3165 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3166 . = 0x8000000;
3167 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3168 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3169@}
3170@end smallexample
3171
3172You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
3173followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
3174descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
3175
252b5132
RH
3176The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
3177sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
3178counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
3179other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
3180current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
3181incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
3182@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
3183
3184The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
3185required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
3186after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
3187which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
3188wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
3189means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
3190
3191Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3192@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3193@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3194
3195The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3196the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3197at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3198output section, the value of the location counter will be
3199@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3200effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
58434bc1 3201immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
252b5132
RH
3202
3203The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3204alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3205example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3206sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3207may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3208sections.
3209
3210That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3211
3212@node Simple Commands
3213@section Simple Linker Script Commands
3214@cindex linker script simple commands
3215In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3216
3217@menu
3218* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3219* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3220@ifclear SingleFormat
3221* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3222@end ifclear
3223
4a93e180 3224* REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
252b5132
RH
3225* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3226@end menu
3227
3228@node Entry Point
36f63dca 3229@subsection Setting the Entry Point
252b5132
RH
3230@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3231@cindex start of execution
3232@cindex first instruction
3233@cindex entry point
3234The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3235point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3236entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3237@smallexample
3238ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3239@end smallexample
3240
3241There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3242entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3243stopping when one of them succeeds:
3244@itemize @bullet
a1ab1d2a 3245@item
252b5132 3246the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
a1ab1d2a 3247@item
252b5132 3248the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
a1ab1d2a 3249@item
3ab904c4
NC
3250the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
3251targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
3252check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
a1ab1d2a 3253@item
252b5132 3254the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
a1ab1d2a 3255@item
252b5132
RH
3256The address @code{0}.
3257@end itemize
3258
3259@node File Commands
36f63dca 3260@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
252b5132
RH
3261@cindex linker script file commands
3262Several linker script commands deal with files.
3263
3264@table @code
3265@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3266@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3267@cindex including a linker script
3268Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3269be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
ff5dcc92 3270with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
252b5132
RH
327110 levels deep.
3272
4006703d
NS
3273You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3274@code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3275
252b5132
RH
3276@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3277@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3278@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3279@cindex input files in linker scripts
3280@cindex input object files in linker scripts
3281@cindex linker script input object files
3282The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3283in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3284
3285For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3286a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3287then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3288
3289In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3290script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3291
e3f2db7f
AO
3292In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3293with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3294located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3295for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3296open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
cad60a33
HPN
3297linker will search through the archive library search path.
3298The @dfn{sysroot prefix} can also be forced by specifying @code{=}
3299as the first character in the filename path. See also the
e3f2db7f 3300description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
252b5132 3301
ff5dcc92 3302If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
252b5132
RH
3303name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
3304@samp{-l}.
3305
3306When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3307files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3308script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3309
3310@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3311@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3312@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3313@cindex grouping input files
3314The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3315files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3316new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3317in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3318
b717d30e
JJ
3319@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3320@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3321@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3322This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3323commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3324as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3325with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3326when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3327@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3328and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3329setting afterwards.
3330
252b5132
RH
3331@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3332@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
b45619c0 3333@cindex output file name in linker script
252b5132
RH
3334The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3335@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3336@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3337Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
3338precedence.
3339
3340You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3341output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3342
3343@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3344@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3345@cindex library search path in linker script
3346@cindex archive search path in linker script
3347@cindex search path in linker script
3348The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
ff5dcc92 3349@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
252b5132
RH
3350@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3351on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3352are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3353the command line option are searched first.
3354
3355@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3356@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3357@cindex first input file
3358The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3359that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3360though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3361when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3362first file.
3363@end table
3364
3365@ifclear SingleFormat
3366@node Format Commands
36f63dca 3367@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
252b5132
RH
3368A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3369
3370@table @code
3371@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3372@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3373@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3374@cindex output file format in linker script
3375The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3376output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
024531e2 3377exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
252b5132
RH
3378(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3379line option takes precedence.
3380
3381You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3382formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3383This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3384desired endianness.
3385
3386If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3387will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3388output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3389used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3390
3391For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3392command:
3393@smallexample
3394OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3395@end smallexample
3396This says that the default format for the output file is
3397@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3398option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3399format.
3400
3401@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3402@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3403@cindex input file format in linker script
3404The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3405files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3406This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3407(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3408is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3409command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3410@end table
3411@end ifclear
3412
4a93e180
NC
3413@node REGION_ALIAS
3414@subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3415@kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3416@cindex region alias
3417@cindex region names
3418
3419Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3420@ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3421
3422@smallexample
3423REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3424@end smallexample
3425
3426The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3427memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3428to memory regions. An example follows.
3429
3430Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3431memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3432that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3433non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3434access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3435read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3436sections:
3437
3438@itemize @bullet
3439@item
3440@code{.text} program code;
3441@item
3442@code{.rodata} read-only data;
3443@item
3444@code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3445@item
3446@code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3447@end itemize
3448
3449The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3450part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3451output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3452systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3453@code{C}:
3454@multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3455@item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
9d5777a3 3456@item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
4a93e180
NC
3457@item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3458@item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3459@item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3460@end multitable
3461The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3462loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3463the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3464the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3465
3466The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3467includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3468memory layout:
3469@smallexample
3470INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3471
3472SECTIONS
3473 @{
3474 .text :
3475 @{
3476 *(.text)
3477 @} > REGION_TEXT
3478 .rodata :
3479 @{
3480 *(.rodata)
3481 rodata_end = .;
3482 @} > REGION_RODATA
3483 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3484 @{
3485 data_start = .;
3486 *(.data)
3487 @} > REGION_DATA
3488 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3489 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3490 .bss :
3491 @{
3492 *(.bss)
3493 @} > REGION_BSS
3494 @}
3495@end smallexample
3496
3497Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3498regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3499variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3500@table @code
3501@item A
3502Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3503@smallexample
3504MEMORY
3505 @{
3506 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3507 @}
3508
3509REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3510REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3511REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3512REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3513@end smallexample
3514@item B
3515Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3516into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3517@code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3518@smallexample
3519MEMORY
3520 @{
3521 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3522 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3523 @}
3524
3525REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3526REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3527REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3528REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3529@end smallexample
3530@item C
3531Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3532@code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3533initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3534system start into the @code{RAM}.
3535@smallexample
3536MEMORY
3537 @{
3538 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3539 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3540 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3541 @}
3542
3543REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3544REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3545REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3546REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3547@end smallexample
3548@end table
3549
3550It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3551@code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3552necessary:
3553@smallexample
3554#include <string.h>
3555
3556extern char data_start [];
3557extern char data_size [];
3558extern char data_load_start [];
3559
3560void copy_data(void)
3561@{
3562 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3563 @{
3564 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3565 @}
3566@}
3567@end smallexample
3568
252b5132 3569@node Miscellaneous Commands
36f63dca 3570@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
252b5132
RH
3571There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3572
3573@table @code
3574@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3575@kindex ASSERT
3576@cindex assertion in linker script
3577Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3578with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3579
fd1c4238
NC
3580Note that assertions are checked before the final stages of linking
3581take place. This means that expressions involving symbols PROVIDEd
3582inside section definitions will fail if the user has not set values
3583for those symbols. The only exception to this rule is PROVIDEd
3584symbols that just reference dot. Thus an assertion like this:
3585
3586@smallexample
3587 .stack :
3588 @{
3589 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3590 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3591 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3592 @}
3593@end smallexample
3594
3595will fail if @code{__stack_size} is not defined elsewhere. Symbols
3596PROVIDEd outside of section definitions are evaluated earlier, so they
3597can be used inside ASSERTions. Thus:
3598
3599@smallexample
3600 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3601 .stack :
3602 @{
3603 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3604 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3605 @}
3606@end smallexample
3607
3608will work.
3609
252b5132
RH
3610@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3611@kindex EXTERN
3612@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3613Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3614symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3615modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3616each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3617command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3618
3619@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3620@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3621@cindex common allocation in linker script
3622This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
ff5dcc92 3623to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
252b5132
RH
3624output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3625
4818e05f
AM
3626@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3627@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3628@cindex common allocation in linker script
3629This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3630command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3631to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3632
53d25da6
AM
3633@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3634@kindex INSERT
3635@cindex insert user script into default script
3636This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3637augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3638inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3639@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3640default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3641sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3642linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3643insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3644linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3645default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3646of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3647to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3648is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3649
3650@smallexample
3651SECTIONS
3652@{
3653 OVERLAY :
3654 @{
3655 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3656 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3657 @}
3658@}
3659INSERT AFTER .text;
3660@end smallexample
3661
252b5132
RH
3662@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3663@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3664@cindex cross references
ff5dcc92 3665This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
252b5132
RH
3666references among certain output sections.
3667
3668In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3669using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3670will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3671errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3672a function defined in the other section.
3673
3674The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
ff5dcc92 3675@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
252b5132
RH
3676an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3677@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3678names.
3679
cdf96953
MF
3680@item NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsection} @dots{})
3681@kindex NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsections})
3682@cindex cross references
3683This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3684references to one section from a list of other sections.
3685
3686The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command is useful when ensuring that two or more
3687output sections are entirely independent but there are situations where
3688a one-way dependency is needed. For example, in a multi-core application
3689there may be shared code that can be called from each core but for safety
3690must never call back.
3691
3692The @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command takes a list of output section names.
3693The first section can not be referenced from any of the other sections.
3694If @command{ld} detects any references to the first section from any of
3695the other sections, it reports an error and returns a non-zero exit
3696status. Note that the @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command uses output section
3697names, not input section names.
3698
252b5132
RH
3699@ifclear SingleFormat
3700@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3701@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3702@cindex machine architecture
3703@cindex architecture
3704Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3705of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3706architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3707the @samp{-f} option.
3708@end ifclear
01554a74
AM
3709
3710@item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3711@kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3712This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3713@var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3714in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3715@xref{Expression Section}.
252b5132
RH
3716@end table
3717
3718@node Assignments
3719@section Assigning Values to Symbols
3720@cindex assignment in scripts
3721@cindex symbol definition, scripts
3722@cindex variables, defining
3723You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
73ae6183 3724the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
252b5132
RH
3725
3726@menu
3727* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
eb8476a6 3728* HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
252b5132 3729* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
7af8e998 3730* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
73ae6183 3731* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
252b5132
RH
3732@end menu
3733
3734@node Simple Assignments
3735@subsection Simple Assignments
3736
3737You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3738
3739@table @code
3740@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3741@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3742@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3743@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3744@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3745@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3746@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3747@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3748@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3749@end table
3750
3751The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3752@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3753defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3754
3755The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
b5666f2f 3756may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
252b5132
RH
3757
3758The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3759
3760Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3761
3762You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3763statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3764section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3765
3766The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3767expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3768
3769Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3770assignments may be used:
3771
3772@smallexample
3773floating_point = 0;
3774SECTIONS
3775@{
3776 .text :
3777 @{
3778 *(.text)
3779 _etext = .;
3780 @}
156e34dd 3781 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
252b5132
RH
3782 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3783@}
3784@end smallexample
3785@noindent
3786In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3787zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3788the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3789defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3790upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3791
eb8476a6
MR
3792@node HIDDEN
3793@subsection HIDDEN
3794@cindex HIDDEN
3795For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
3796exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3797
3798Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
3799@code{HIDDEN}:
3800
3801@smallexample
3802HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
3803SECTIONS
3804@{
3805 .text :
3806 @{
3807 *(.text)
3808 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
3809 @}
3810 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
3811 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3812@}
3813@end smallexample
3814@noindent
3815In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
3816
252b5132
RH
3817@node PROVIDE
3818@subsection PROVIDE
3819@cindex PROVIDE
3820In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3821only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3822the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3823@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3824@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3825@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3826@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3827@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3828
3829Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3830@smallexample
3831SECTIONS
3832@{
3833 .text :
3834 @{
3835 *(.text)
3836 _etext = .;
3837 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3838 @}
3839@}
3840@end smallexample
3841
3842In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3843underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3844the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3845underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3846If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3847linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3848
7af8e998
L
3849@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3850@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3851@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3852Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3853hidden and won't be exported.
3854
73ae6183
NC
3855@node Source Code Reference
3856@subsection Source Code Reference
3857
3858Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3859intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3860a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3861symbol that does not have a value.
3862
3863Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3864transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3865stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3866prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3867mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3868of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3869variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3870linker script variable might be referred to as:
3871
3872@smallexample
3873 extern int foo;
3874@end smallexample
3875
3876But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3877
3878@smallexample
3879 _foo = 1000;
3880@end smallexample
3881
3882In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3883transformation has taken place.
3884
3885When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3886things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3887in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3888second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3889table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3890contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3891value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3892
3893@smallexample
3894 int foo = 1000;
3895@end smallexample
3896
10bf6894 3897creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
73ae6183
NC
3898holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3899number 1000 is initially stored.
3900
3901When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3902first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3903memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
3904So:
3905
3906@smallexample
3907 foo = 1;
3908@end smallexample
3909
3910looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
3911associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
3912address. Whereas:
3913
3914@smallexample
3915 int * a = & foo;
3916@end smallexample
3917
10bf6894 3918looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
73ae6183
NC
3919and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
3920the variable @samp{a}.
3921
3922Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
3923the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
3924an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
3925
3926@smallexample
3927 foo = 1000;
3928@end smallexample
3929
3930creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
3931the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
3932address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
3933linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
3934access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
3935
3936Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
3937you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
3938use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
3939section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
3940linker script contains these declarations:
3941
3942@smallexample
3943@group
3944 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
a5e406b5 3945 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM);
73ae6183
NC
3946 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
3947@end group
3948@end smallexample
3949
3950Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
3951
3952@smallexample
3953@group
3954 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
c0065db7 3955
73ae6183
NC
3956 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
3957@end group
3958@end smallexample
3959
3960Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
5707d2ad
NC
3961Alternatively the symbols can be treated as the names of vectors or
3962arrays and then the code will again work as expected:
3963
3964@smallexample
3965@group
3966 extern char start_of_ROM[], end_of_ROM[], start_of_FLASH[];
3967
3968 memcpy (start_of_FLASH, start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM - start_of_ROM);
3969@end group
3970@end smallexample
3971
3972Note how using this method does not require the use of @samp{&}
3973operators.
73ae6183 3974
252b5132 3975@node SECTIONS
36f63dca 3976@section SECTIONS Command
252b5132
RH
3977@kindex SECTIONS
3978The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
3979into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
3980
3981The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
3982@smallexample
3983SECTIONS
3984@{
3985 @var{sections-command}
3986 @var{sections-command}
3987 @dots{}
3988@}
3989@end smallexample
3990
3991Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
3992
3993@itemize @bullet
3994@item
3995an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
3996@item
3997a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3998@item
3999an output section description
4000@item
4001an overlay description
4002@end itemize
4003
4004The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
4005@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
4006those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
4007understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
4008the layout of the output file.
4009
4010Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
4011below.
4012
4013If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
4014linker will place each input section into an identically named output
4015section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
4016input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
4017example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
4018in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
4019
4020@menu
4021* Output Section Description:: Output section description
4022* Output Section Name:: Output section name
4023* Output Section Address:: Output section address
4024* Input Section:: Input section description
4025* Output Section Data:: Output section data
4026* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
4027* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
4028* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
4029* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
4030@end menu
4031
4032@node Output Section Description
36f63dca 4033@subsection Output Section Description
252b5132
RH
4034The full description of an output section looks like this:
4035@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4036@group
7e7d5768 4037@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759 4038 [AT(@var{lma})]
1eec346e 4039 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
0c71d759
NC
4040 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4041 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4042 @{
4043 @var{output-section-command}
4044 @var{output-section-command}
4045 @dots{}
abc9061b 4046 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
252b5132
RH
4047@end group
4048@end smallexample
4049
4050Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
4051
4052The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
4053name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
abc9061b
CC
4054The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
4055the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
252b5132
RH
4056The line breaks and other white space are optional.
4057
4058Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
4059
4060@itemize @bullet
4061@item
4062a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4063@item
4064an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
4065@item
4066data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
4067@item
4068a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
4069@end itemize
4070
4071@node Output Section Name
36f63dca 4072@subsection Output Section Name
252b5132
RH
4073@cindex name, section
4074@cindex section name
4075The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
4076meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
4077support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
4078must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
4079example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
4080output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
4081names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
4082quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
4083characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
4084commas must be quoted.
4085
4086The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
4087Discarding}.
4088
4089@node Output Section Address
2a16d82a 4090@subsection Output Section Address
252b5132
RH
4091@cindex address, section
4092@cindex section address
4093The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
ea5cae92
NC
4094address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
4095is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
4096
4097If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
4098section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
4099to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
4100alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
4101contained within the output section.
4102
4103The output section address heuristic is as follows:
4104
4105@itemize @bullet
4106@item
4107If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
4108is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
4109in that region.
4110
4111@item
4112If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
4113regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
4114section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
4115be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
4116
4117@item
4118If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
4119the output address will be based on the current value of the location
4120counter.
4121@end itemize
4122
4123@noindent
4124For example:
4125
252b5132
RH
4126@smallexample
4127.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
4128@end smallexample
ea5cae92 4129
252b5132
RH
4130@noindent
4131and
ea5cae92 4132
252b5132
RH
4133@smallexample
4134.text : @{ *(.text) @}
4135@end smallexample
ea5cae92 4136
252b5132
RH
4137@noindent
4138are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
4139@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
4140counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
ea5cae92
NC
4141counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
4142input sections.
252b5132
RH
4143
4144The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
4145For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
4146so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
4147do something like this:
4148@smallexample
4149.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
4150@end smallexample
4151@noindent
4152This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
4153aligned upward to the specified value.
4154
4155Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
6ce340f1
NC
4156location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
4157sections are ignored).
252b5132
RH
4158
4159@node Input Section
36f63dca 4160@subsection Input Section Description
252b5132
RH
4161@cindex input sections
4162@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
4163The most common output section command is an input section description.
4164
4165The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
4166You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
4167in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
4168map the input files into your memory layout.
4169
4170@menu
4171* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
4172* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
4173* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
4174* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
4175* Input Section Example:: Input section example
4176@end menu
4177
4178@node Input Section Basics
36f63dca 4179@subsubsection Input Section Basics
252b5132
RH
4180@cindex input section basics
4181An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
4182by a list of section names in parentheses.
4183
4184The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
4185describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
4186
4187The most common input section description is to include all input
4188sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
4189include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
4190@smallexample
4191*(.text)
4192@end smallexample
4193@noindent
18625d54
CM
4194Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
4195of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
4196match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
4197example:
252b5132 4198@smallexample
b4346c09 4199*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
252b5132 4200@end smallexample
765b7cbe
JB
4201will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o} and
4202@file{otherfile.o} to be included.
252b5132
RH
4203
4204There are two ways to include more than one section:
4205@smallexample
4206*(.text .rdata)
4207*(.text) *(.rdata)
4208@end smallexample
4209@noindent
4210The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
4211@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
b6bf44ba
AM
4212first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
4213they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
252b5132
RH
4214@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
4215@samp{.rdata} input sections.
4216
a5bf7d4f
AB
4217When using EXCLUDE_FILE with more than one section, the exclusion only
4218applies to the section immediately following, for example:
4219@smallexample
4220*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text .rdata)
4221@end smallexample
4222@noindent
4223will cause all @samp{.text} sections from all files except
4224@file{somefile.o} to be included, while all @samp{.rdata} sections
4225from all files, including @file{somefile.o}, will be included. To
4226exclude the @samp{.rdata} sections from @file{somefile.o} the example
4227should be modified to:
4228@smallexample
4229*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .rdata)
4230@end smallexample
4231
252b5132
RH
4232You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
4233You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
4234needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
4235@smallexample
4236data.o(.data)
4237@end smallexample
4238
ae17ab41
CM
4239To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
4240of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
4241
4242Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
4243
4244@smallexample
4245@group
4246SECTIONS @{
4247 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
4248 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
4249@}
4250@end group
4251@end smallexample
4252
4253In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
4254input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
4255@code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
4256@samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
4257whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
4258
967928e9
AM
4259You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
4260matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
4261with no whitespace around the colon.
4262
4263@table @samp
4264@item archive:file
4265matches file within archive
4266@item archive:
4267matches the whole archive
4268@item :file
4269matches file but not one in an archive
4270@end table
4271
4272Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4273wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4274single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4275@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4276within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4277also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4278other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4279from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4280command.
4281
252b5132
RH
4282If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4283the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4284commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4285@smallexample
4286data.o
4287@end smallexample
4288
967928e9
AM
4289When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4290and does not contain any wild card
252b5132
RH
4291characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4292name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4293did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4294though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4295@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4296the archive search path.
4297
4298@node Input Section Wildcards
36f63dca 4299@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
252b5132
RH
4300@cindex input section wildcards
4301@cindex wildcard file name patterns
4302@cindex file name wildcard patterns
4303@cindex section name wildcard patterns
4304In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4305name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4306
4307The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4308pattern for the file name.
4309
4310The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4311
4312@table @samp
4313@item *
4314matches any number of characters
4315@item ?
4316matches any single character
4317@item [@var{chars}]
4318matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4319character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4320@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4321@item \
4322quotes the following character
4323@end table
4324
4325When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4326will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4327Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4328exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4329@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4330a @samp{/} character.
4331
4332File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4333specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4334does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4335
4336If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4337appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4338will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4339sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4340@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4341@smallexample
4342.data : @{ *(.data) @}
4343.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4344@end smallexample
4345
bcaa7b3e 4346@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
252b5132
RH
4347Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4348in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
bcaa7b3e
L
4349this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4350pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4351@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
252b5132
RH
4352into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4353
bcaa7b3e
L
4354@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4355@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4356difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
1ae5c3ae 4357descending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
ee83b8a6
NC
4358Larger alignments are placed before smaller alignments in order to
4359reduce the amount of padding necessary.
bcaa7b3e 4360
02ecc8e9
L
4361@cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4362@code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4363difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
4364ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
4365encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
4366
bcaa7b3e
L
4367@cindex SORT
4368@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4369
4370When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4371can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4372
4373@enumerate
4374@item
4375@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4376It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4377sections have the same name.
4378@item
4379@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4380It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4381sections have the same alignment.
4382@item
c0065db7 4383@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
bcaa7b3e
L
4384treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4385@item
4386@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4387is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4388@item
4389All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4390@end enumerate
4391
4392When both command line section sorting option and linker script
4393section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4394takes precedence over the command line option.
4395
4396If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4397command line option will make the section sorting command to be
4398treated as nested sorting command.
4399
4400@enumerate
4401@item
4402@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4403@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4404@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4405@item
4406@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4407@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4408@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4409@end enumerate
4410
4411If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4412command line option will be ignored.
4413
eda680f8
L
4414@cindex SORT_NONE
4415@code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command line
4416section sorting option.
4417
252b5132
RH
4418If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4419@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4420precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4421
4422This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4423files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4424sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4425The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4426with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4427linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4428@smallexample
4429@group
4430SECTIONS @{
4431 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4432 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4433 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4434 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4435@}
4436@end group
4437@end smallexample
4438
4439@node Input Section Common
36f63dca 4440@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
252b5132
RH
4441@cindex common symbol placement
4442@cindex uninitialized data placement
4443A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4444file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4445linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4446named @samp{COMMON}.
4447
4448You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4449other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4450particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4451input files are placed in another section.
4452
4453In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4454@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4455@smallexample
4456.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4457@end smallexample
4458
4459@cindex scommon section
4460@cindex small common symbols
4461Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4462example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4463symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4464different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4465the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4466symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4467to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4468locations.
4469
4470@cindex [COMMON]
4471You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4472notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4473@samp{*(COMMON)}.
4474
4475@node Input Section Keep
36f63dca 4476@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
252b5132
RH
4477@cindex KEEP
4478@cindex garbage collection
4479When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
a1ab1d2a 4480it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
252b5132
RH
4481This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4482with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
bcaa7b3e 4483@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
252b5132
RH
4484
4485@node Input Section Example
36f63dca 4486@subsubsection Input Section Example
252b5132
RH
4487The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4488to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4489start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4490@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4491follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4492@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4493@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4494All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4495files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4496
4497@smallexample
4498@group
4499SECTIONS @{
4500 outputa 0x10000 :
4501 @{
4502 all.o
4503 foo.o (.input1)
4504 @}
36f63dca
NC
4505@end group
4506@group
252b5132
RH
4507 outputb :
4508 @{
4509 foo.o (.input2)
4510 foo1.o (.input1)
4511 @}
36f63dca
NC
4512@end group
4513@group
252b5132
RH
4514 outputc :
4515 @{
4516 *(.input1)
4517 *(.input2)
4518 @}
4519@}
4520@end group
a1ab1d2a 4521@end smallexample
252b5132
RH
4522
4523@node Output Section Data
36f63dca 4524@subsection Output Section Data
252b5132
RH
4525@cindex data
4526@cindex section data
4527@cindex output section data
4528@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4529@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4530@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4531@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4532@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4533You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4534@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4535an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4536parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4537value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4538counter.
4539
4540The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4541store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4542bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4543stored.
4544
4545For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4546of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4547@smallexample
4548BYTE(1)
4549LONG(addr)
4550@end smallexample
4551
4552When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4553same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4554target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4555@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4556@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4557
4558If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4559which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4560When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4561true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4562endianness of the first input object file.
4563
36f63dca 4564Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
2b5fc1f5
NC
4565between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4566@smallexample
4567SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4568@end smallexample
4569whereas this will work:
4570@smallexample
4571SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4572@end smallexample
4573
252b5132
RH
4574@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4575@cindex holes, filling
4576@cindex unspecified memory
4577You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4578current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4579otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4580gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
a139d329 4581with the value of the expression, repeated as
252b5132
RH
4582necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4583point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4584than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4585different parts of an output section.
4586
4587This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
563e308f 4588value @samp{0x90}:
252b5132 4589@smallexample
563e308f 4590FILL(0x90909090)
252b5132
RH
4591@end smallexample
4592
4593The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
9673c93c 4594section attribute, but it only affects the
252b5132
RH
4595part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4596entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
9673c93c 4597precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
a139d329 4598expression.
252b5132
RH
4599
4600@node Output Section Keywords
36f63dca 4601@subsection Output Section Keywords
252b5132
RH
4602There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4603commands.
4604
4605@table @code
4606@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4607@cindex input filename symbols
4608@cindex filename symbols
4609@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4610The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4611The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4612file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4613the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4614
4615This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4616normally used for any other object file format.
4617
4618@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4619@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4620@cindex constructors, arranging in link
4621@item CONSTRUCTORS
4622When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4623unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4624destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4625arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4626automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4627For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4628linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4629@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4630ignored for other object file formats.
4631
4632The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
7e69709c
AM
4633constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4634Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4635the start and end of the global destructors. The
252b5132
RH
4636first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4637of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4638compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4639formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4640@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4641the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4642destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4643@code{exit}.
4644
4645For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4646arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4647addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4648and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4649linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4650runtime code expects to see.
4651
4652@smallexample
4653 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4654 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4655 *(.ctors)
4656 LONG(0)
4657 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4658 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4659 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4660 *(.dtors)
4661 LONG(0)
4662 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4663@end smallexample
4664
4665If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4666which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4667are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4668are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
bcaa7b3e
L
4669command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4670@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4671@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
252b5132
RH
4672@samp{*(.dtors)}.
4673
4674Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4675and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4676need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4677scripts.
4678
4679@end table
4680
4681@node Output Section Discarding
36f63dca 4682@subsection Output Section Discarding
252b5132
RH
4683@cindex discarding sections
4684@cindex sections, discarding
4685@cindex removing sections
2edab91c
AM
4686The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
4687This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
4688may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
252b5132 4689@smallexample
49c13adb 4690.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
252b5132
RH
4691@end smallexample
4692@noindent
4693will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
74541ad4
AM
4694@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4695sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
2edab91c
AM
4696space in an output section will also create the output section. So
4697too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
4698space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
4699@samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
4700@samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
4701This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
74541ad4 4702
a0976ea4 4703The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
74541ad4
AM
4704on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4705symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
a0976ea4
AM
4706the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4707section is discarded.
252b5132
RH
4708
4709@cindex /DISCARD/
4710The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4711input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4712section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4713
4714@node Output Section Attributes
36f63dca 4715@subsection Output Section Attributes
252b5132
RH
4716@cindex output section attributes
4717We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4718like this:
0c71d759 4719
252b5132 4720@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4721@group
7e7d5768 4722@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
4723 [AT(@var{lma})]
4724 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4725 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4726 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4727 @{
4728 @var{output-section-command}
4729 @var{output-section-command}
4730 @dots{}
562d3460 4731 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
4732@end group
4733@end smallexample
0c71d759 4734
252b5132
RH
4735We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4736@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4737remaining section attributes.
4738
a1ab1d2a 4739@menu
252b5132
RH
4740* Output Section Type:: Output section type
4741* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
bbf115d3 4742* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
7e7d5768 4743* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
0c71d759 4744* Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
252b5132
RH
4745* Output Section Region:: Output section region
4746* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4747* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4748@end menu
4749
4750@node Output Section Type
36f63dca 4751@subsubsection Output Section Type
252b5132
RH
4752Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4753parentheses. The following types are defined:
4754
4755@table @code
4756@item NOLOAD
4757The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4758loaded into memory when the program is run.
4759@item DSECT
4760@itemx COPY
4761@itemx INFO
4762@itemx OVERLAY
4763These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4764rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4765marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4766section when the program is run.
4767@end table
4768
4769@kindex NOLOAD
4770@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4771@cindex loading, preventing
4772The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4773the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4774the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4775@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
2e76e85a 4776need to be loaded when the program is run.
252b5132
RH
4777@smallexample
4778@group
4779SECTIONS @{
4780 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4781 @dots{}
4782@}
4783@end group
4784@end smallexample
4785
4786@node Output Section LMA
36f63dca 4787@subsubsection Output Section LMA
562d3460 4788@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
252b5132
RH
4789@kindex AT(@var{lma})
4790@cindex load address
4791@cindex section load address
4792Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
ea5cae92
NC
4793@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4794@pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
4795specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
4796address is optional.
6bdafbeb 4797
ea5cae92
NC
4798The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
4799specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
4800takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
4801load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
4802region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
dc0b6aa0
AM
4803
4804If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
ea5cae92
NC
4805section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
4806load address:
4807
4808@itemize @bullet
4809@item
4810If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
4811the LMA address as well.
4812
4813@item
4814If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
4815
4816@item
4817Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
4818with the current section, and this region contains at least one
4819section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
4820VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
4821the last section in the located region.
4822
4823@item
4824If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
4825that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
4826
4827@item
4828If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
4829section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
4830@end itemize
252b5132
RH
4831
4832@cindex ROM initialized data
4833@cindex initialized data in ROM
4834This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4835example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4836called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4837@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4838even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4839uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4840defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4841counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4842
4843@smallexample
4844@group
4845SECTIONS
4846 @{
4847 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
a1ab1d2a 4848 .mdata 0x2000 :
252b5132
RH
4849 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
4850 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
4851 .bss 0x3000 :
4852 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
4853@}
4854@end group
4855@end smallexample
4856
4857The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
4858this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
4859the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
4860how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
4861script.
4862
4863@smallexample
4864@group
4865extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
4866char *src = &_etext;
4867char *dst = &_data;
4868
ea5cae92
NC
4869/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
4870while (dst < &_edata)
252b5132 4871 *dst++ = *src++;
252b5132 4872
ea5cae92 4873/* Zero bss. */
252b5132
RH
4874for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
4875 *dst = 0;
4876@end group
4877@end smallexample
4878
bbf115d3
L
4879@node Forced Output Alignment
4880@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
4881@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
4882@cindex forcing output section alignment
4883@cindex output section alignment
1eec346e 4884You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
13075d04
SH
4885alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
4886intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
bbf115d3 4887
7e7d5768
AM
4888@node Forced Input Alignment
4889@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
4890@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
4891@cindex forcing input section alignment
4892@cindex input section alignment
4893You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
4894SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
4895sections, whether larger or smaller.
4896
0c71d759
NC
4897@node Output Section Constraint
4898@subsubsection Output Section Constraint
4899@kindex ONLY_IF_RO
4900@kindex ONLY_IF_RW
4901@cindex constraints on output sections
4902You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
4903of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
4904read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
4905@code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
4906
252b5132 4907@node Output Section Region
36f63dca 4908@subsubsection Output Section Region
252b5132
RH
4909@kindex >@var{region}
4910@cindex section, assigning to memory region
4911@cindex memory regions and sections
4912You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
4913using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
4914
4915Here is a simple example:
4916@smallexample
4917@group
4918MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
4919SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
4920@end group
4921@end smallexample
4922
4923@node Output Section Phdr
36f63dca 4924@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
252b5132
RH
4925@kindex :@var{phdr}
4926@cindex section, assigning to program header
4927@cindex program headers and sections
4928You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
4929using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
4930one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
4931assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
4932@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
4933linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
4934
4935Here is a simple example:
4936@smallexample
4937@group
4938PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
4939SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
4940@end group
4941@end smallexample
4942
4943@node Output Section Fill
36f63dca 4944@subsubsection Output Section Fill
252b5132
RH
4945@kindex =@var{fillexp}
4946@cindex section fill pattern
4947@cindex fill pattern, entire section
4948You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
4949@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
4950(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
4951within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
a139d329
AM
4952alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
4953necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
9673c93c 4954of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
a139d329
AM
4955an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
4956fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
9673c93c 4957other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
a139d329
AM
4958pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
4959expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
252b5132
RH
4960
4961You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
9673c93c 4962output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
252b5132
RH
4963
4964Here is a simple example:
4965@smallexample
4966@group
563e308f 4967SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
252b5132
RH
4968@end group
4969@end smallexample
4970
4971@node Overlay Description
36f63dca 4972@subsection Overlay Description
252b5132
RH
4973@kindex OVERLAY
4974@cindex overlays
4975An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
4976are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
4977the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
4978copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
4979required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
4980can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
4981than another.
4982
4983Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
4984@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
4985output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
4986command is as follows:
4987@smallexample
4988@group
4989OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
4990 @{
4991 @var{secname1}
4992 @{
4993 @var{output-section-command}
4994 @var{output-section-command}
4995 @dots{}
4996 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4997 @var{secname2}
4998 @{
4999 @var{output-section-command}
5000 @var{output-section-command}
5001 @dots{}
5002 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5003 @dots{}
abc9061b 5004 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
252b5132
RH
5005@end group
5006@end smallexample
5007
5008Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
5009section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
5010section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
11e7fd74 5011those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
252b5132
RH
5012except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
5013sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
5014
abc9061b
CC
5015The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
5016the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
5017
252b5132
RH
5018The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
5019addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
5020memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
5021whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
5022and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
5023and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
5024
56dd11f0
NC
5025If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
5026references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
5027the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
5028sense for one section to refer directly to another.
5029@xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
252b5132
RH
5030
5031For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
34711ca3 5032provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
252b5132
RH
5033defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
5034@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
5035the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
5036within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
5037symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
5038
5039At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
5040the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
5041
5042Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
5043@code{SECTIONS} construct.
5044@smallexample
5045@group
5046 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
5047 @{
5048 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5049 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5050 @}
5051@end group
5052@end smallexample
5053@noindent
5054This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
5055address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
5056@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
34711ca3 5057following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
252b5132
RH
5058@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
5059@code{__load_stop_text1}.
5060
5061C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
5062like the following.
5063
5064@smallexample
5065@group
5066 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
5067 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
5068 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
5069@end group
5070@end smallexample
5071
5072Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
5073everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
5074example could have been written identically as follows.
5075
5076@smallexample
5077@group
5078 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
5079 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
5080 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
252b5132 5081 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
5082 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
5083 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
252b5132
RH
5084 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
5085@end group
5086@end smallexample
5087
5088@node MEMORY
36f63dca 5089@section MEMORY Command
252b5132
RH
5090@kindex MEMORY
5091@cindex memory regions
5092@cindex regions of memory
5093@cindex allocating memory
5094@cindex discontinuous memory
5095The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
5096memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
5097
5098The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
5099memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
5100may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
5101can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
5102set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
5103regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
5104around to fit into the available regions.
5105
127fcdff
AB
5106A linker script may contain many uses of the @code{MEMORY} command,
5107however, all memory blocks defined are treated as if they were
5108specified inside a single @code{MEMORY} command. The syntax for
5109@code{MEMORY} is:
252b5132
RH
5110@smallexample
5111@group
a1ab1d2a 5112MEMORY
252b5132
RH
5113 @{
5114 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
5115 @dots{}
5116 @}
5117@end group
5118@end smallexample
5119
5120The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
5121region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
5122Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5123with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4a93e180
NC
5124must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
5125add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
9d5777a3 5126command.
252b5132
RH
5127
5128@cindex memory region attributes
5129The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
5130whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
5131not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
5132@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
5133section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
5134the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
5135them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
5136
5137The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
5138@table @samp
5139@item R
5140Read-only section
5141@item W
5142Read/write section
5143@item X
5144Executable section
5145@item A
5146Allocatable section
5147@item I
5148Initialized section
5149@item L
5150Same as @samp{I}
5151@item !
c09e9a8c 5152Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
252b5132
RH
5153@end table
5154
5155If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
5156@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
5157attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
5158in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
5159attributes.
5160
5161@kindex ORIGIN =
5162@kindex o =
5163@kindex org =
9cd6d51a
NC
5164The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
5165the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
5166cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
5167abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
5168@code{ORG}).
252b5132
RH
5169
5170@kindex LENGTH =
5171@kindex len =
5172@kindex l =
5173The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
5174region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
9cd6d51a
NC
5175be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
5176@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
252b5132
RH
5177
5178In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
5179available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
5180and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
5181linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
5182is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
5183or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
5184explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
5185region.
5186
5187@smallexample
5188@group
a1ab1d2a 5189MEMORY
252b5132
RH
5190 @{
5191 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
5192 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
5193 @}
5194@end group
5195@end smallexample
5196
5197Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
5198specific output sections into that memory region by using the
5199@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
5200a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
5201output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
5202was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
5203the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
5204output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
5205region, the linker will issue an error message.
5206
3ec57632 5207It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
c0065db7 5208expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
3ec57632
NC
5209@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
5210
5211@smallexample
5212@group
c0065db7 5213 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
3ec57632
NC
5214@end group
5215@end smallexample
5216
252b5132
RH
5217@node PHDRS
5218@section PHDRS Command
5219@kindex PHDRS
5220@cindex program headers
5221@cindex ELF program headers
5222@cindex program segments
5223@cindex segments, ELF
5224The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
5225@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
5226loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
5227program with the @samp{-p} option.
5228
5229When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
5230reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
5231program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
5232This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
5233interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
5234
5235The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
5236in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
5237precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
5238the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
5239not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
5240
5241The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
5242generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
5243ignore @code{PHDRS}.
5244
5245This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
5246@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
5247
5248@smallexample
5249@group
5250PHDRS
5251@{
5252 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
5253 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
5254@}
5255@end group
5256@end smallexample
5257
5258The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
5259of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
5260header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5261with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5c1a3f0f
NS
5262must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
5263is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
252b5132
RH
5264
5265Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
5266system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
5267specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
5268sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
5269attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
5270Section Phdr}.
5271
5272It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5273merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5274repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5275contain the section.
5276
5277If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5278then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5279not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5280convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5281placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5282default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5283segment at all.
5284
5285@kindex FILEHDR
5286@kindex PHDRS
5c1a3f0f 5287You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
252b5132
RH
5288the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5289The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5290file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5c1a3f0f 5291include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
4100cea3
AM
5292segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5293these keywords.
252b5132
RH
5294
5295The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5296value of the keyword.
5297
5298@table @asis
5299@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5300Indicates an unused program header.
5301
5302@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5303Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5304the file.
5305
5306@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5307Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5308
5309@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5310Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5311found.
5312
5313@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5314Indicates a segment holding note information.
5315
5316@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5317A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5318ABI.
5319
5320@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5321Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5322
5323@item @var{expression}
5324An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5325be used for types not defined above.
5326@end table
5327
5328You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5329in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5330@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5331Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5332output section attribute.
5333
5334The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5335which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5336explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5337an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5338header.
5339
5340Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5341headers used on a native ELF system.
5342
5343@example
5344@group
5345PHDRS
5346@{
5347 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5348 interp PT_INTERP ;
5349 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5350 data PT_LOAD ;
5351 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5352@}
5353
5354SECTIONS
5355@{
5356 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5357 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5358 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5359 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5360 @dots{}
5361 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5362 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5363 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5364 @dots{}
5365@}
5366@end group
5367@end example
5368
5369@node VERSION
5370@section VERSION Command
5371@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5372@cindex symbol versions
5373@cindex version script
5374@cindex versions of symbols
5375The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5376only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5377symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5378a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5379shared library.
5380
5381You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5382you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5383also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5384
5385The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5386@smallexample
5387VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5388@end smallexample
5389
5390The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5391Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5392version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5393version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5394version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5395scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5396library.
5397
5398The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5399examples.
5400
5401@smallexample
5402VERS_1.1 @{
5403 global:
5404 foo1;
5405 local:
a1ab1d2a
UD
5406 old*;
5407 original*;
5408 new*;
252b5132
RH
5409@};
5410
5411VERS_1.2 @{
5412 foo2;
5413@} VERS_1.1;
5414
5415VERS_2.0 @{
5416 bar1; bar2;
c0065db7 5417 extern "C++" @{
86043bbb 5418 ns::*;
bb1515f2
MF
5419 "f(int, double)";
5420 @};
252b5132
RH
5421@} VERS_1.2;
5422@end smallexample
5423
5424This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5425version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5426The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5427a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
313e35ee
AM
5428of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5429symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5430is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5431in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
86043bbb
MM
5432However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5433name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
252b5132
RH
5434
5435Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5436depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5437to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5438
5439Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5440depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5441and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5442
5443When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5444specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5445unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
a981ed6f 5446unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
ae5a3597
AM
5447somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5448wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5449wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5450set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5451ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
252b5132
RH
5452
5453The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5454they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5455could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5456However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5457
0f6bf451 5458Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
6b9b879a
JJ
5459in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5460symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5461won't.
5462
5463@smallexample
7c9c73be 5464@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
9d201f2f 5465@end smallexample
6b9b879a 5466
252b5132
RH
5467When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5468symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5469requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5470shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5471loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5472linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5473application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5474way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5475all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5476search for each symbol reference.
5477
5478The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5479doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5480that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5481functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5482the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5483required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5484that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5485versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5486the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5487
5488There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5489first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5490source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5491script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5492maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5493@smallexample
5494__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5495@end smallexample
5496@noindent
5497in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5498be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5499The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
96a94295
L
5500@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5501takes precedence over a version script.
252b5132
RH
5502
5503The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5504function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5505an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5506version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5507linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5508
5509To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5510source file. Here is an example:
5511
5512@smallexample
5513__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5514__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5515__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5516__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5517@end smallexample
5518
5519In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5520unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5521example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5522@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5523
5524When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5525some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5526this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5527@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5528declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5529you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5530
5531If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5532within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
36f63dca 5533(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
252b5132
RH
5534specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5535
cb840a31
L
5536You can also specify the language in the version script:
5537
5538@smallexample
5539VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5540@end smallexample
5541
c0065db7 5542The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
cb840a31
L
5543The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5544demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
bb1515f2
MF
5545patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5546@samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
cb840a31 5547
86043bbb
MM
5548Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5549described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5550or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5551the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5552whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5553cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5554might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5555should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5556expect when you upgrade.
5557
252b5132
RH
5558@node Expressions
5559@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5560@cindex expressions
5561@cindex arithmetic
5562The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5563that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5564expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5565host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5566
5567You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5568
5569The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5570expressions.
5571
5572@menu
5573* Constants:: Constants
0c71d759 5574* Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
252b5132 5575* Symbols:: Symbol Names
ecca9871 5576* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
252b5132
RH
5577* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5578* Operators:: Operators
5579* Evaluation:: Evaluation
5580* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5581* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5582@end menu
5583
5584@node Constants
5585@subsection Constants
5586@cindex integer notation
5587@cindex constants in linker scripts
5588All constants are integers.
5589
5590As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5591octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
8a308ae8 5592hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
11e7fd74 5593@samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
8a308ae8
NC
5594@samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5595value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
252b5132
RH
5596
5597@cindex scaled integers
5598@cindex K and M integer suffixes
5599@cindex M and K integer suffixes
5600@cindex suffixes for integers
5601@cindex integer suffixes
5602In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5603constant by
5604@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5605@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5606@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5607@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5608@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5609@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5610@tex
5611${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5612@end tex
5613@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8a308ae8
NC
5614respectively. For example, the following
5615all refer to the same quantity:
5616
252b5132 5617@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5618_fourk_1 = 4K;
5619_fourk_2 = 4096;
5620_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
8a308ae8 5621_fourk_4 = 10000o;
252b5132
RH
5622@end smallexample
5623
8a308ae8
NC
5624Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5625conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5626
0c71d759
NC
5627@node Symbolic Constants
5628@subsection Symbolic Constants
5629@cindex symbolic constants
5630@kindex CONSTANT
5631It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5632the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5633
5634@table @code
5635@item MAXPAGESIZE
5636@kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5637The target's maximum page size.
5638
5639@item COMMONPAGESIZE
5640@kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5641The target's default page size.
5642@end table
5643
5644So for example:
5645
5646@smallexample
9d5777a3 5647 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
0c71d759
NC
5648@end smallexample
5649
5650will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5651supported by the target.
5652
252b5132
RH
5653@node Symbols
5654@subsection Symbol Names
5655@cindex symbol names
5656@cindex names
5657@cindex quoted symbol names
5658@kindex "
5659Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5660and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5661Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5662specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5663keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5664@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5665"SECTION" = 9;
5666"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
252b5132
RH
5667@end smallexample
5668
5669Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5670to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5671whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5672
ecca9871
L
5673@node Orphan Sections
5674@subsection Orphan Sections
5675@cindex orphan
5676Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5677are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5678script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5679output file, but it has to guess as to where they should be
5680placed. The linker uses a simple heuristic to do this. It
5681attempts to place orphan sections after non-orphan sections of the
5682same attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc.
5683If there is not enough room to do this then it places
5684at the end of the file.
5685
5686For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type as
5687well as section flag.
5688
c005eb9e
AB
5689The command line options @samp{--orphan-handling} and @samp{--unique}
5690(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}) can be used to control which
5691output sections an orphan is placed in.
5692
41911f68 5693If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
a61ca861 5694the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
9aec8434 5695__start_SECNAME and __stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
41911f68
NC
5696section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
5697orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
5698representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
5699character.
5700
252b5132
RH
5701@node Location Counter
5702@subsection The Location Counter
5703@kindex .
5704@cindex dot
5705@cindex location counter
5706@cindex current output location
5707The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5708current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5709location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5710within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5711anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5712
5713@cindex holes
5714Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5715moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
dc0b6aa0
AM
5716location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5717and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5718doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
252b5132
RH
5719
5720@smallexample
5721SECTIONS
5722@{
5723 output :
5724 @{
5725 file1(.text)
5726 . = . + 1000;
5727 file2(.text)
5728 . += 1000;
5729 file3(.text)
563e308f 5730 @} = 0x12345678;
252b5132
RH
5731@}
5732@end smallexample
5733@noindent
5734In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5735located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5736followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5737@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
563e308f 5738@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
252b5132
RH
5739specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5740
5c6bbab8
NC
5741@cindex dot inside sections
5742Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5743current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
69da35b5 5744statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5c6bbab8
NC
5745absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5746however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5747not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5748
5749@smallexample
5750SECTIONS
5751@{
5752 . = 0x100
5753 .text: @{
5754 *(.text)
5755 . = 0x200
5756 @}
5757 . = 0x500
5758 .data: @{
5759 *(.data)
5760 . += 0x600
5761 @}
5762@}
5763@end smallexample
5764
5765The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5766and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5767the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5768much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5769move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5770and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5771the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5772the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5773
b5666f2f
AM
5774@cindex dot outside sections
5775Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5776output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5777needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5778
5779@smallexample
5780SECTIONS
5781@{
5782 start_of_text = . ;
5783 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5784 end_of_text = . ;
5785
5786 start_of_data = . ;
5787 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5788 end_of_data = . ;
5789@}
5790@end smallexample
5791
5792If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5793not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5794between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5795should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5796blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5797the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5798sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5799statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5800special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5801place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5802as follows:
5803
5804@smallexample
5805SECTIONS
5806@{
5807 start_of_text = . ;
5808 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5809 end_of_text = . ;
5810
5811 start_of_data = . ;
5812 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5813 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5814 end_of_data = . ;
5815@}
5816@end smallexample
5817
5818This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5819@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5820placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5821assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5822a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5823section. So you could write:
5824
5825@smallexample
5826SECTIONS
5827@{
5828 start_of_text = . ;
5829 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5830 end_of_text = . ;
5831
5832 . = . ;
5833 start_of_data = . ;
5834 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5835 end_of_data = . ;
5836@}
5837@end smallexample
5838
5839Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
5840@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
5841
252b5132
RH
5842@need 2000
5843@node Operators
5844@subsection Operators
5845@cindex operators for arithmetic
5846@cindex arithmetic operators
5847@cindex precedence in expressions
5848The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
5849the standard bindings and precedence levels:
5850@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5851@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5852@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5853@smallexample
5854precedence associativity Operators Notes
5855(highest)
58561 left ! - ~ (1)
58572 left * / %
58583 left + -
58594 left >> <<
58605 left == != > < <= >=
58616 left &
58627 left |
58638 left &&
58649 left ||
586510 right ? :
586611 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
5867(lowest)
5868@end smallexample
5869Notes:
a1ab1d2a 5870(1) Prefix operators
252b5132
RH
5871(2) @xref{Assignments}.
5872@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5873@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5874@tex
5875\vskip \baselineskip
5876%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
5877\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
5878\hrule
5879\halign
5880{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
5881height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5882&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
5883height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5884\noalign{\hrule}
5885height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5886&highest&&&&&\cr
5887% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
a1ab1d2a 5888&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
252b5132
RH
5889&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
5890&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
5891&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
5892&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
5893&6&&left&&\&&\cr
5894&7&&left&&|&\cr
5895&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
5896&9&&left&&||&\cr
5897&10&&right&&? :&\cr
5898&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
5899&lowest&&&&&\cr
5900height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
5901\hrule}
5902@end tex
5903@iftex
5904{
5905@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
5906@dag@quad Prefix operators.
5907@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
5908}
5909@end iftex
5910@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5911
5912@node Evaluation
5913@subsection Evaluation
5914@cindex lazy evaluation
5915@cindex expression evaluation order
5916The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
5917an expression when absolutely necessary.
5918
5919The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
5920address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
5921regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
5922as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
5923
5924However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
5925until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
5926other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
5927for use in the symbol assignment expression.
5928
5929The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
5930assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
5931allocation.
5932
5933Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
5934@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
5935
5936If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
5937available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
5938following
5939@smallexample
5940@group
5941SECTIONS
5942 @{
a1ab1d2a 5943 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
252b5132
RH
5944 @{ *(.text) @}
5945 @}
5946@end group
5947@end smallexample
5948@noindent
5949will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
5950address}.
5951
5952@node Expression Section
5953@subsection The Section of an Expression
5954@cindex expression sections
5955@cindex absolute expressions
5956@cindex relative expressions
5957@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
5958@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
5959@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
7542af2a
AM
5960Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
5961relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
5962using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
5963value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
5964symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
5965operations.
5966
abf4be64
AM
5967Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
5968section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
5969address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
5970@code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
5971functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
01554a74
AM
5972One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
5973(@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
5c3049d2
AM
5974differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
5975versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
5976section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
5977Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
01554a74
AM
5978absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
5979given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
5980everywhere.
5c3049d2
AM
5981
5982In the following simple example,
252b5132 5983
7542af2a
AM
5984@smallexample
5985@group
5986SECTIONS
5987 @{
5988 . = 0x100;
5989 __executable_start = 0x100;
5990 .data :
5991 @{
5992 . = 0x10;
5993 __data_start = 0x10;
5994 *(.data)
5995 @}
5996 @dots{}
5997 @}
5998@end group
5999@end smallexample
252b5132 6000
7542af2a
AM
6001both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
6002address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
6003@code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
6004section in the second two assignments.
252b5132 6005
5c3049d2
AM
6006For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
6007addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
7542af2a
AM
6008
6009@itemize @bullet
6010@item
c05f749e
AM
6011Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
6012operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
6013absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
6014@item
7542af2a
AM
6015Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
6016relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
6017and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
6018@item
c05f749e
AM
6019Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
6020in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
6021address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
6022before applying the operator.
7542af2a
AM
6023@end itemize
6024
6025The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
6026
6027@itemize @bullet
6028@item
6029An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
6030@item
6031The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
6032@item
9bc8bb33 6033The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
11e7fd74 6034relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
94b41882
AM
6035(after above conversions) is also a number when
6036@code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} or inside an output section definition
6037but an absolute address otherwise.
9bc8bb33
AM
6038@item
6039The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
6040relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
6041section as the relative operand(s).
7542af2a
AM
6042@item
6043The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
6044conversions) is an absolute address.
6045@end itemize
252b5132
RH
6046
6047You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
6048to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
6049create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
6050section @samp{.data}:
6051@smallexample
6052SECTIONS
6053 @{
6054 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
6055 @}
6056@end smallexample
6057@noindent
6058If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
6059@samp{.data} section.
6060
7542af2a
AM
6061Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
6062particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
6063
252b5132
RH
6064@node Builtin Functions
6065@subsection Builtin Functions
6066@cindex functions in expressions
6067The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
6068use in linker script expressions.
6069
6070@table @code
6071@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6072@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6073@cindex expression, absolute
6074Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
6075of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
6076value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
6077normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
6078
6079@item ADDR(@var{section})
6080@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
6081@cindex section address in expression
7542af2a 6082Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
252b5132 6083script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
7542af2a
AM
6084the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
6085@code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
6086@code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
6087the other two will be absolute:
252b5132
RH
6088@smallexample
6089@group
6090SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6091 .output1 :
a1ab1d2a 6092 @{
252b5132
RH
6093 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
6094 @dots{}
6095 @}
6096 .output :
6097 @{
6098 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
6099 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
6100 @}
6101@dots{} @}
6102@end group
6103@end smallexample
6104
876f4090
NS
6105@item ALIGN(@var{align})
6106@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6107@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
6108@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
252b5132
RH
6109@cindex round up location counter
6110@cindex align location counter
876f4090
NS
6111@cindex round up expression
6112@cindex align expression
6113Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
6114to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
6115doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
6116arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
6117expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
e0a3af22 6118equivalent to @code{ALIGN(ABSOLUTE(.), @var{align})}).
876f4090
NS
6119
6120Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
6121next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
6122variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
6123input sections:
252b5132
RH
6124@smallexample
6125@group
6126SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6127 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
6128 *(.data)
6129 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
6130 @}
6131@dots{} @}
6132@end group
6133@end smallexample
6134@noindent
6135The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
6136a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
6137a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
6138of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
6139
6140The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
6141
362c1d1a
NS
6142@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6143@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6144@cindex section alignment
6145Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6146been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6147evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6148the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
6149value in that section.
6150@smallexample
6151@group
6152SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6153 .output @{
6154 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
6155 @dots{}
6156 @}
6157@dots{} @}
6158@end group
6159@end smallexample
6160
252b5132
RH
6161@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
6162@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
6163This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
6164scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
6165section.
6166
2d20f7bf
JJ
6167@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6168@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6169This is equivalent to either
6170@smallexample
6171(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
6172@end smallexample
6173or
6174@smallexample
fe6052e1
AM
6175(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize})
6176 + ((. + @var{commonpagesize} - 1) & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
2d20f7bf
JJ
6177@end smallexample
6178@noindent
6179depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
6180for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
6181@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
6182If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
6183memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
6184bytes in the on-disk file.
6185
6186This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
6187any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
6188@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
6189be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
6190working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
6191
6192@noindent
6193Example:
6194@smallexample
6195 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
6196@end smallexample
6197
6198@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6199@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6200This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
6201evaluation purposes.
6202
6203@smallexample
6204 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
6205@end smallexample
6206
a4f5ad88
JJ
6207@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6208@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6209This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
eec2f3ed 6210@samp{-z relro} option is used.
a4f5ad88
JJ
6211When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
6212does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
6213@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
6214boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
6215it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
eec2f3ed
AM
6216@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
6217padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
6218section alignment.
a4f5ad88
JJ
6219
6220@smallexample
6221 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
6222@end smallexample
6223
252b5132
RH
6224@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6225@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6226@cindex symbol defaults
6227Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
420e579c
HPN
6228defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
6229return 0. You can use this function to provide
252b5132
RH
6230default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
6231shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
6232the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
6233existed, its value is preserved:
6234
6235@smallexample
6236@group
6237SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6238 .text : @{
6239 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
6240 @dots{}
6241 @}
6242 @dots{}
6243@}
6244@end group
6245@end smallexample
6246
3ec57632
NC
6247@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
6248@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
6249Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6250
252b5132
RH
6251@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
6252@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
6253@cindex section load address in expression
7542af2a 6254Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
252b5132
RH
6255Section LMA}).
6256
2e53f7d6
NC
6257@item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6258@kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6259Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
6260@code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
6261
252b5132
RH
6262@kindex MAX
6263@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6264Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6265
6266@kindex MIN
6267@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6268Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6269
6270@item NEXT(@var{exp})
6271@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
6272@cindex unallocated address, next
6273Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
6274This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
6275use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
6276output file, the two functions are equivalent.
6277
3ec57632
NC
6278@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6279@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6280Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6281
ba916c8a
MM
6282@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6283@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6284Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
c5da8c7d
NC
6285value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6286@samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6287will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6288can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
7542af2a 6289``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
ba916c8a
MM
6290name.
6291
252b5132
RH
6292@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6293@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6294@cindex section size
6295Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6296been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6297evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6298@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6299@smallexample
6300@group
6301SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6302 .output @{
6303 .start = . ;
6304 @dots{}
6305 .end = . ;
6306 @}
6307 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6308 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6309@dots{} @}
6310@end group
6311@end smallexample
6312
6313@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6314@itemx sizeof_headers
6315@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6316@cindex header size
6317Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6318information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6319this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6320choose, to facilitate paging.
6321
6322@cindex not enough room for program headers
6323@cindex program headers, not enough room
6324When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6325@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6326number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6327addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6328additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6329room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6330the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6331script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6332you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6333command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6334@end table
6335
6336@node Implicit Linker Scripts
6337@section Implicit Linker Scripts
6338@cindex implicit linker scripts
6339If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6340an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6341linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6342linker will report an error.
6343
6344An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6345
6346Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6347assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6348commands.
6349
6350Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6351at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6352read. This can affect archive searching.
6353
6354@ifset GENERIC
6355@node Machine Dependent
6356@chapter Machine Dependent Features
6357
6358@cindex machine dependencies
ff5dcc92
SC
6359@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6360sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
252b5132
RH
6361functionality are not listed.
6362
6363@menu
36f63dca
NC
6364@ifset H8300
6365* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6366@end ifset
6367@ifset I960
6368* i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
6369@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
6370@ifset M68HC11
6371* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6372@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
6373@ifset ARM
6374* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6375@end ifset
6376@ifset HPPA
6377* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6378@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
6379@ifset M68K
6380* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6381@end ifset
833794fc
MR
6382@ifset MIPS
6383* MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6384@end ifset
3c3bdf30 6385@ifset MMIX
36f63dca 6386* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
3c3bdf30 6387@end ifset
2469cfa2 6388@ifset MSP430
36f63dca 6389* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
2469cfa2 6390@end ifset
35c08157
KLC
6391@ifset NDS32
6392* NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6393@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
6394@ifset NIOSII
6395* Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6396@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
6397@ifset POWERPC
6398* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6399@end ifset
6400@ifset POWERPC64
6401* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6402@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
6403@ifset SPU
6404* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6405@end ifset
74459f0e 6406@ifset TICOFF
ff5dcc92 6407* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
74459f0e 6408@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
6409@ifset WIN32
6410* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6411@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
6412@ifset XTENSA
6413* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6414@end ifset
252b5132
RH
6415@end menu
6416@end ifset
6417
252b5132
RH
6418@ifset H8300
6419@ifclear GENERIC
6420@raisesections
6421@end ifclear
6422
6423@node H8/300
ff5dcc92 6424@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
252b5132
RH
6425
6426@cindex H8/300 support
ff5dcc92 6427For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
252b5132
RH
6428you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6429
6430@table @emph
6431@cindex relaxing on H8/300
6432@item relaxing address modes
ff5dcc92 6433@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
252b5132
RH
6434targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6435program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6436respectively.
6437
6438@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6439@item synthesizing instructions
81f5558e 6440@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
ff5dcc92 6441@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
252b5132
RH
6442sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6443page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6444(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6445@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6446top page of memory).
1502569c 6447
81f5558e
NC
6448@command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6449indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6450displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6451the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6452@code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6453whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6454range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6455
1502569c 6456@item bit manipulation instructions
c0065db7 6457@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
1502569c 6458biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
c0065db7 6459which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
1502569c
NC
6460page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6461(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
c0065db7 6462@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c
NC
6463the top page of memory).
6464
6465@item system control instructions
c0065db7
RM
6466@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
646732 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
1502569c
NC
6468changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6469(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
c0065db7 6470@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c 6471the top page of memory).
252b5132
RH
6472@end table
6473
6474@ifclear GENERIC
6475@lowersections
6476@end ifclear
6477@end ifset
6478
36f63dca 6479@ifclear GENERIC
c2dcd04e 6480@ifset Renesas
36f63dca 6481@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
c2dcd04e
NC
6482@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6483@node Renesas
6484@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
36f63dca 6485
c2dcd04e
NC
6486@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6487H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6488options are required for these chips.
36f63dca
NC
6489@end ifset
6490@end ifclear
6491
6492@ifset I960
6493@ifclear GENERIC
6494@raisesections
6495@end ifclear
6496
6497@node i960
6498@section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
6499
6500@cindex i960 support
6501
6502You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
6503specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
6504family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
6505incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
6506linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
6507libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
6508search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
6509
6510For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
6511well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
6512paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
6513the names
6514
6515@smallexample
6516@group
6517try
6518libtry.a
6519tryca
6520libtryca.a
6521@end group
6522@end smallexample
6523
6524@noindent
6525The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
6526two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
6527
6528You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
6529the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
6530use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
6531specifies a library.
6532
6533@cindex @option{--relax} on i960
6534@cindex relaxing on i960
6535@command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
6536you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
6537@code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
6538them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
6539instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
6540instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
6541target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
6542not itself call any subroutines).
6543
6544@ifclear GENERIC
6545@lowersections
6546@end ifclear
6547@end ifset
6548
6549@ifset ARM
6550@ifclear GENERIC
6551@raisesections
6552@end ifclear
6553
93fd0973
SC
6554@ifset M68HC11
6555@ifclear GENERIC
6556@raisesections
6557@end ifclear
6558
6559@node M68HC11/68HC12
6560@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6561
6562@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6563
6564@subsection Linker Relaxation
6565
6566For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6567optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6568
6569@table @emph
6570@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6571@item relaxing address modes
6572@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6573targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6574program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6575respectively.
6576
6577@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6578transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6579page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6580
6581@item relaxing gcc instruction group
6582When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6583of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6584addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6585@code{bset} instructions.
6586
6587@end table
6588
6589@subsection Trampoline Generation
6590
6591@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6592@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6593For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6594call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
c0065db7 6595will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
93fd0973
SC
6596trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6597case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6598point to the function trampoline.
6599
6600@ifclear GENERIC
6601@lowersections
6602@end ifclear
6603@end ifset
6604
36f63dca 6605@node ARM
3674e28a 6606@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
36f63dca
NC
6607
6608@cindex ARM interworking support
6609@kindex --support-old-code
6610For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
b45619c0 6611between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
36f63dca
NC
6612been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6613line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6614libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6615option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6616given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6617which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6618the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6619non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6620
6621@cindex thumb entry point
6622@cindex entry point, thumb
6623@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6624The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6625@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6626But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6627branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6628executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6629
ce11ba6c
KT
6630@cindex PE import table prefixing
6631@kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6632The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6633the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
11e7fd74 6634element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
ce11ba6c
KT
6635import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6636
e489d0ae
PB
6637@cindex BE8
6638@kindex --be8
6639The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
080bb7bb
NC
6640executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian
6641objects - ie ones which have been assembled with the @option{-EB}
6642option. The resulting image will contain big-endian data and
6643little-endian code.
e489d0ae 6644
3674e28a
PB
6645@cindex TARGET1
6646@kindex --target1-rel
6647@kindex --target1-abs
6648The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6649@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6650or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6651and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6652
6653@cindex TARGET2
6654@kindex --target2=@var{type}
6655The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6656@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6657meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6658@table @samp
6659@item rel
eeac373a
PB
6660@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6661@item abs
6662@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
3674e28a
PB
6663@item got-rel
6664@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6665@end table
6666
319850b4
JB
6667@cindex FIX_V4BX
6668@kindex --fix-v4bx
6669The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6670specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6671interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6672also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6673
6674In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6675linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6676@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6677
6678In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6679relocations are ignored.
6680
845b51d6
PB
6681@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6682@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6683Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6684relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6685
6686@smallexample
6687TST rM, #1
6688MOVEQ PC, rM
6689BX Rn
6690@end smallexample
6691
6692This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6693and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
11e7fd74 6694condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
845b51d6 6695
33bfe774
JB
6696@cindex USE_BLX
6697@kindex --use-blx
6698The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6699BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6700situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6701code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6702each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6703
6704This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6705specify it if you are using that target.
6706
c6dd86c6
JB
6707@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6708@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6709The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6710bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6711instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6712to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6713the support code can read the intended values.
6714
6715The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6716intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6717and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6718intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6719full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6720you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6721
6722If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6723enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6724@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6725mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6726vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6727@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6728
6729If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6730potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6731such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6732first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6733instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6734the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6735are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6736
2de70689
MGD
6737@cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6738@kindex --fix-arm1176
6739@kindex --no-fix-arm1176
9d5777a3
RM
6740The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6741in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6742are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
2de70689
MGD
6743unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6744
9d5777a3 6745Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
11e7fd74 6746Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
2de70689
MGD
6747http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6748
a504d23a
LA
6749@cindex STM32L4xx erratum workaround
6750@kindex --fix-stm32l4xx-629360
6751
6752The @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360} switch enables a link-time
6753workaround for a bug in the bus matrix / memory controller for some of
6754the STM32 Cortex-M4 based products (STM32L4xx). When accessing
6755off-chip memory via the affected bus for bus reads of 9 words or more,
6756the bus can generate corrupt data and/or abort. These are only
6757core-initiated accesses (not DMA), and might affect any access:
6758integer loads such as LDM, POP and floating-point loads such as VLDM,
6759VPOP. Stores are not affected.
6760
6761The bug can be avoided by splitting memory accesses into the
6762necessary chunks to keep bus reads below 8 words.
6763
6764The workaround is not enabled by default, this is equivalent to use
6765@samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=none}. If you know you are using buggy
6766STM32L4xx hardware, you can enable the workaround by specifying the
6767linker option @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360}, or the equivalent
6768@samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=default}.
6769
6770If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6771potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6772such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists in a
6773replacement sequence emulating the behaviour of the original one and a
6774branch back to the subsequent instruction. The original instruction is
6775then replaced with a branch to the veneer.
6776
6777The workaround does not always preserve the memory access order for
6778the LDMDB instruction, when the instruction loads the PC.
6779
6780The workaround is not able to handle problematic instructions when
6781they are in the middle of an IT block, since a branch is not allowed
6782there. In that case, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
6783occurs.
6784
6785The workaround is not able to replace problematic instructions with a
6786PC-relative branch instruction if the @samp{.text} section is too
6787large. In that case, when the branch that replaces the original code
6788cannot be encoded, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
6789occurs.
6790
bf21ed78
MS
6791@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6792@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
726150b7 6793The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
bf21ed78
MS
6794warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6795enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6796linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6797using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6798not be diagnosed.
a9dc9481
JM
6799
6800@cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6801@kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6802The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6803warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6804@code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6805linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6806using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
bf21ed78 6807
726150b7
NC
6808@cindex PIC_VENEER
6809@kindex --pic-veneer
6810The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6811ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6812is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6813@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6814
6815@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6816@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6817The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6818code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6819perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6820placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6821controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6822The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
11e7fd74 6823duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
726150b7
NC
6824group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6825code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6826where they should be placed.
6827
6828The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6829@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
07d72278 6830placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
726150b7
NC
6831branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6832placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6833value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6834exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6835A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6836linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6837from the input sections.
6838
6839The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6840@samp{N = +1}.
6841
1a51c1a4
NC
6842Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6843only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6844otherwise.
6845
1db37fe6
YG
6846@cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
6847@kindex --fix-cortex-a8
6848@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
6849The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
6850
6851The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
6852
68fcca92
JW
6853@cindex Cortex-A53 erratum 835769 workaround
6854@kindex --fix-cortex-a53-835769
6855@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a53-835769
6856The @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769} switch enables a link-time workaround for erratum 835769 present on certain early revisions of Cortex-A53 processors. The workaround is disabled by default. It can be enabled by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a53-835769}.
6857
6858Please contact ARM for further details.
6859
1db37fe6
YG
6860@kindex --merge-exidx-entries
6861@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
6862@cindex Merging exidx entries
6863The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
6864
6865@kindex --long-plt
6866@cindex 32-bit PLT entries
6867The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
6868which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
6869entries which only support 512Mb of code.
6870
1f56df9d
JW
6871@kindex --no-apply-dynamic-relocs
6872@cindex AArch64 rela addend
6873The @samp{--no-apply-dynamic-relocs} option makes AArch64 linker do not apply
6874link-time values for dynamic relocations.
6875
4ba2ef8f
TP
6876@cindex Placement of SG veneers
6877All SG veneers are placed in the special output section @code{.gnu.sgstubs}.
6878Its start address must be set, either with the command line option
6879@samp{--section-start} or in a linker script, to indicate where to place these
6880veneers in memory.
6881
54ddd295
TP
6882@kindex --cmse-implib
6883@cindex Secure gateway import library
6884The @samp{--cmse-implib} option requests that the import libraries
6885specified by the @samp{--out-implib} and @samp{--in-implib} options are
6886secure gateway import libraries, suitable for linking a non-secure
6887executable against secure code as per ARMv8-M Security Extensions.
6888
0955507f
TP
6889@kindex --in-implib=@var{file}
6890@cindex Input import library
6891The @samp{--in-implib=file} specifies an input import library whose symbols
6892must keep the same address in the executable being produced. A warning is
6893given if no @samp{--out-implib} is given but new symbols have been introduced
6894in the executable that should be listed in its import library. Otherwise, if
6895@samp{--out-implib} is specified, the symbols are added to the output import
6896library. A warning is also given if some symbols present in the input import
6897library have disappeared from the executable. This option is only effective
6898for Secure Gateway import libraries, ie. when @samp{--cmse-implib} is
6899specified.
6900
36f63dca
NC
6901@ifclear GENERIC
6902@lowersections
6903@end ifclear
6904@end ifset
6905
6906@ifset HPPA
6907@ifclear GENERIC
6908@raisesections
6909@end ifclear
6910
6911@node HPPA ELF32
6912@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
6913@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
6914@kindex --multi-subspace
6915When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
6916import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
6917The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
6918stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
6919multiple sub-spaces.
6920
6921@cindex HPPA stub grouping
6922@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6923Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
6924stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6925@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6926sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6927a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6928the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6929conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6930prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6931A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6932branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6933@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6934@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6935detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6936positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6937
6938Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6939single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6940create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6941large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6942
6943@ifclear GENERIC
6944@lowersections
6945@end ifclear
6946@end ifset
6947
7fb9f789
NC
6948@ifset M68K
6949@ifclear GENERIC
6950@raisesections
6951@end ifclear
6952
6953@node M68K
6954@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6955
6956@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
6957@kindex --got=@var{type}
6958The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
6959The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
6960@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
6961the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
6962@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
6963entries only at non-negative offsets.
6964@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
6965entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
6966support such GOTs.
6967@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
6968output file. All GOT references from a single input object
6969file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
6970files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
6971
6972@ifclear GENERIC
6973@lowersections
6974@end ifclear
6975@end ifset
6976
833794fc
MR
6977@ifset MIPS
6978@ifclear GENERIC
6979@raisesections
6980@end ifclear
6981
6982@node MIPS
6983@section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6984
6985@cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
6986@kindex --insn32
6987@kindex --no-insn32
6988The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
6989microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
6990in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
6991used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
6992or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
6993including 16-bit ones where possible.
6994
6995@ifclear GENERIC
6996@lowersections
6997@end ifclear
6998@end ifset
6999
36f63dca
NC
7000@ifset MMIX
7001@ifclear GENERIC
7002@raisesections
7003@end ifclear
7004
7005@node MMIX
7006@section @code{ld} and MMIX
7007For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
7008@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
7009understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
7010can translate between the two formats.
7011
7012There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
7013Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
7014registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
7015equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
7016@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
7017global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
7018this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
7019symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
7020
7a2de473
HPN
7021Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
7022@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
7023The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
7024of a section.
36f63dca
NC
7025
7026Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
7027are left out from an mmo file.
7028
7029@ifclear GENERIC
7030@lowersections
7031@end ifclear
7032@end ifset
7033
7034@ifset MSP430
7035@ifclear GENERIC
7036@raisesections
7037@end ifclear
7038
7039@node MSP430
7040@section @code{ld} and MSP430
7041For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
7042will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
7043just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
7044
7045@cindex MSP430 extra sections
7046The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
7047
7048@table @code
7049@item @samp{.vectors}
7050Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
7051
7052@item @samp{.bootloader}
7053Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
7054in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7055
7056@item @samp{.infomem}
7057Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
7058this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7059
c0065db7 7060@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
36f63dca
NC
7061This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
7062in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
7063
7064@item @samp{.noinit}
7065Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
7066
c0065db7 7067The last two sections are used by gcc.
36f63dca
NC
7068@end table
7069
7070@ifclear GENERIC
7071@lowersections
7072@end ifclear
7073@end ifset
7074
35c08157
KLC
7075@ifset NDS32
7076@ifclear GENERIC
7077@raisesections
7078@end ifclear
7079
7080@node NDS32
7081@section @code{ld} and NDS32
7082@kindex relaxing on NDS32
7083For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
7084relaxes objects according to these options.
7085
7086@table @code
7087@item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
7088Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
7089
7090@item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
7091Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
7092
7093@item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
7094Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
7095
7096@item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
7097Export the EX9 table after linking.
7098
7099@item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
7100Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
7101
7102@item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
7103Update the existing EX9 table.
7104
7105@item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
7106Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
7107
7108@item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
7109Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
7110
7111@item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
7112Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
7113
7114@item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
7115Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
7116@end table
7117
7118@ifclear GENERIC
7119@lowersections
7120@end ifclear
7121@end ifset
7122
78058a5e
SL
7123@ifset NIOSII
7124@ifclear GENERIC
7125@raisesections
7126@end ifclear
7127
7128@node Nios II
7129@section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
7130@cindex Nios II call relaxation
7131@kindex --relax on Nios II
7132
7133Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
7134transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
7135which may result in @command{ld} giving
7136@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7137The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
7138trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
7139outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
7140trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
7141be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
7142larger than 256MB.
7143
7144The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
7145is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
7146@option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
7147locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
7148source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
7149register as a temporary.
7150
7151Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
7152relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
7153option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
7154
7155@ifclear GENERIC
7156@lowersections
7157@end ifclear
7158@end ifset
7159
2a60a7a8
AM
7160@ifset POWERPC
7161@ifclear GENERIC
7162@raisesections
7163@end ifclear
7164
7165@node PowerPC ELF32
7166@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
7167@cindex PowerPC long branches
7168@kindex --relax on PowerPC
7169Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
7170displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
7171@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7172@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
7173the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
7174section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
c8a1f254
NS
7175section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
7176@samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
7177both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
7178considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
2a60a7a8
AM
7179
7180@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
7181@table @option
7182@cindex PowerPC PLT
7183@kindex --bss-plt
7184@item --bss-plt
7185Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
7186generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
7187the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
7188writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
7189@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
7190PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
7191compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
7192BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
7193
016687f8
AM
7194@kindex --secure-plt
7195@item --secure-plt
7196@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
7197@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
7198when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
7199layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
7200style BSS PLT.
7201
2a60a7a8
AM
7202@cindex PowerPC GOT
7203@kindex --sdata-got
7204@item --sdata-got
7205The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
7206sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
7207@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
7208section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
7209@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
7210@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
7211@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
7212@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
7213PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
7214pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
7215GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
7216really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
7217
7218@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
7219@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7220@item --emit-stub-syms
7221This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7222symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7223
7224@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
7225@kindex --no-tls-optimize
7226@item --no-tls-optimize
7227PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7228sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7229disable the optimization.
7230@end table
7231
7232@ifclear GENERIC
7233@lowersections
7234@end ifclear
7235@end ifset
7236
7237@ifset POWERPC64
7238@ifclear GENERIC
7239@raisesections
7240@end ifclear
7241
7242@node PowerPC64 ELF64
7243@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
7244
7245@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
7246@table @option
7247@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
7248@kindex --stub-group-size
7249@item --stub-group-size
7250Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
7251by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7252@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7253sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7254a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7255the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7256conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7257prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7258A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7259branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7260@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7261@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7262detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7263positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7264
7265Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7266single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7267create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7268large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7269
7270@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
7271@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7272@item --emit-stub-syms
7273This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7274symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7275
7276@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
7277@kindex --dotsyms
7278@kindex --no-dotsyms
95421fb9
AM
7279@item --dotsyms
7280@itemx --no-dotsyms
2a60a7a8
AM
7281These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
7282in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
7283function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
7284code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
7285properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
7286to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
7287@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
7288dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
7289feature.
7290
7ae4ea7d
AM
7291@cindex PowerPC64 register save/restore functions
7292@kindex --save-restore-funcs
7293@kindex --no-save-restore-funcs
95421fb9
AM
7294@item --save-restore-funcs
7295@itemx --no-save-restore-funcs
7ae4ea7d
AM
7296These two options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} automatically
7297provides out-of-line register save and restore functions used by
7298@samp{-Os} code. The default is to provide any such referenced
7299function for a normal final link, and to not do so for a relocatable
7300link.
7301
2a60a7a8
AM
7302@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
7303@kindex --no-tls-optimize
7304@item --no-tls-optimize
7305PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7306sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7307disable the optimization.
7308
7c9cf415
AM
7309@cindex PowerPC64 __tls_get_addr optimization
7310@kindex --tls-get-addr-optimize
7311@kindex --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
95421fb9
AM
7312@item --tls-get-addr-optimize
7313@itemx --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7c9cf415
AM
7314These options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} uses a special
7315stub to call __tls_get_addr. PowerPC64 glibc 2.22 and later support
7316an optimization that allows the second and subsequent calls to
7317@code{__tls_get_addr} for a given symbol to be resolved by the special
7318stub without calling in to glibc. By default the linker enables this
7319option when glibc advertises the availability of __tls_get_addr_opt.
7320Forcing this option on when using an older glibc won't do much besides
7321slow down your applications, but may be useful if linking an
7322application against an older glibc with the expectation that it will
7323normally be used on systems having a newer glibc.
7324
2a60a7a8
AM
7325@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
7326@kindex --no-opd-optimize
7327@item --no-opd-optimize
7328PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
7329corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
e7fc76dd 7330the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
2a60a7a8
AM
7331Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
7332
7333@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
7334@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
7335@item --non-overlapping-opd
7336Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
7337@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
7338the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
7339entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
7340
7341@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
7342@kindex --no-toc-optimize
7343@item --no-toc-optimize
7344PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
7345entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
7346reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
7347marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
7348marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
7349relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
7350unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
7351reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
7352discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
7353reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
7354code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
7355optimization.
7356
7357@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
7358@kindex --no-multi-toc
7359@item --no-multi-toc
794e51c0
AM
7360If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
7361@code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
7362where TOC
2a60a7a8
AM
7363entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
7364total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
7365grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
7366TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
7367calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
7368help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
736964K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
7370Use this option to turn off this feature.
794e51c0
AM
7371
7372@cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
7373@kindex --no-toc-sort
7374@item --no-toc-sort
7375By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
7376happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
7377placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
7378with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
7379referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
7380@code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
7381results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
7382off this feature.
7383
7384@cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
7385@kindex --plt-align
7386@kindex --no-plt-align
7387@item --plt-align
7388@itemx --no-plt-align
7389Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
e05fa0ba
AM
7390padded so that they don't cross a 32-byte boundary, or to the
7391specified power of two boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. Note
7392that this isn't alignment in the usual sense. By default PLT call
7393stubs are packed tightly.
794e51c0
AM
7394
7395@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7396@kindex --plt-static-chain
7397@kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7398@item --plt-static-chain
7399@itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7400Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7401chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7402chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7403
7404@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7405@kindex --plt-thread-safe
7406@kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7407@item --plt-thread-safe
7408@itemx --no-thread-safe
7409With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7410lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7411another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7412order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7413memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7414barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7415looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7416seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7417default behaviour.
2a60a7a8
AM
7418@end table
7419
7420@ifclear GENERIC
7421@lowersections
7422@end ifclear
7423@end ifset
7424
49fa1e15
AM
7425@ifset SPU
7426@ifclear GENERIC
7427@raisesections
7428@end ifclear
7429
7430@node SPU ELF
7431@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7432
7433@cindex SPU ELF options
7434@table @option
7435
7436@cindex SPU plugins
7437@kindex --plugin
7438@item --plugin
7439This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7440
7441@cindex SPU overlays
7442@kindex --no-overlays
7443@item --no-overlays
7444Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7445regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7446@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7447turns off all this special overlay handling.
7448
7449@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7450@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7451@item --emit-stub-syms
7452This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7453symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7454
7455@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7456@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7457@item --extra-overlay-stubs
7458This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7459function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7460on calls to non-overlay regions.
7461
7462@cindex SPU local store size
7463@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7464@item --local-store=lo:hi
7465@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7466the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7467range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7468
c0065db7 7469@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7470@kindex --stack-analysis
7471@item --stack-analysis
7472SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7473unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7474under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7475@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7476@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7477determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7478for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7479for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7480for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7481find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7482and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7483under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7484dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7485is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7486and calls will be given.
7487
c0065db7 7488@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7489@kindex --emit-stack-syms
7490@item --emit-stack-syms
7491This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7492in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7493These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7494functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7495functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7496such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7497The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
c0065db7 7498@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
49fa1e15
AM
7499@end table
7500
7501@ifclear GENERIC
7502@lowersections
7503@end ifclear
7504@end ifset
7505
36f63dca
NC
7506@ifset TICOFF
7507@ifclear GENERIC
7508@raisesections
7509@end ifclear
7510
7511@node TI COFF
7512@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7513@cindex TI COFF versions
7514@kindex --format=@var{version}
7515The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7516TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7517also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7518format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7519header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7520
7521@ifclear GENERIC
7522@lowersections
7523@end ifclear
7524@end ifset
7525
2ca22b03
NC
7526@ifset WIN32
7527@ifclear GENERIC
7528@raisesections
7529@end ifclear
7530
7531@node WIN32
7532@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7533
c0065db7 7534This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
b45619c0 7535See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
dc8465bf 7536command line options mentioned here.
2ca22b03
NC
7537
7538@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7539@cindex import libraries
7540@item import libraries
69da35b5 7541The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
2ca22b03 7542libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
69da35b5
NC
7543regular static archives and are handled as any other static
7544archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
2ca22b03
NC
7545support for creating such libraries provided with the
7546@samp{--out-implib} command line option.
7547
c0065db7
RM
7548@item exporting DLL symbols
7549@cindex exporting DLL symbols
dc8465bf
NC
7550The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
7551
7552@table @emph
7553@item using auto-export functionality
7554@cindex using auto-export functionality
7555By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
7556which is controlled by the following command line options:
7557
0a5d968e
NC
7558@itemize
7559@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
7560@item --exclude-symbols
7561@item --exclude-libs
e1c37eb5 7562@item --exclude-modules-for-implib
09e2aba4 7563@item --version-script
0a5d968e
NC
7564@end itemize
7565
09e2aba4
DK
7566When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
7567(global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
7568symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
7569often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
7570private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
9d5777a3 7571options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
09e2aba4
DK
7572exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
7573final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
7574
7575If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
0a5d968e
NC
7576command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
7577if either of the following are true:
7578
7579@itemize
7580@item A DEF file is used.
7581@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
7582@end itemize
dc8465bf 7583
c0065db7
RM
7584@item using a DEF file
7585@cindex using a DEF file
dc8465bf
NC
7586Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
7587an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7588exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7589name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
0a5d968e 7590command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
dc8465bf
NC
7591
7592@example
7593gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7594@end example
7595
0a5d968e
NC
7596Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7597@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7598
dc8465bf
NC
7599Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7600
7601@example
4b5bd4e7 7602LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
dc8465bf
NC
7603
7604EXPORTS
7605foo
7606bar
7607_bar = bar
4b5bd4e7
DS
7608another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7609var1 DATA
7fcab871
KT
7610doo = foo == foo2
7611eoo DATA == var1
c0065db7 7612@end example
dc8465bf 7613
7fcab871 7614This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
4b5bd4e7
DS
7615symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7616alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7617by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7618@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7fcab871
KT
7619@code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7620export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7621in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7622symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
4b5bd4e7 7623
6b31ad16
DS
7624The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7625name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7626the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7627
b45619c0
NC
7628When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7629library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6b31ad16 7630@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
c0065db7 7631executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6b31ad16
DS
7632
7633With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7634specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
c0065db7 7635non-default base address for the image.
6b31ad16
DS
7636
7637If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
a2877985
DS
7638or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7639filename specified on the command line.
6b31ad16 7640
4b5bd4e7
DS
7641The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7642
7643@example
7644EXPORTS
7645 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7646 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7fcab871 7647 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
c0065db7 7648@end example
4b5bd4e7
DS
7649
7650Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7651@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7652@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7653@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7654Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7fcab871
KT
7655@samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7656string in import/export table for the symbol.
4b5bd4e7
DS
7657
7658The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7659
7660@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7661will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7662by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7663linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7664library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7665
7666@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7667The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7668the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7669@code{*_imp__foo}).
7670
7671@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7672well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7673read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7674variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7675the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7676extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7677application will behave unexpectedly.
7678
7679@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7680it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7681symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
7682API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
7683the DLL without an import library.
c0065db7 7684
4b5bd4e7
DS
7685See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
7686other DEF file statements
dc8465bf
NC
7687
7688@cindex creating a DEF file
7689While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
7690with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
0a5d968e
NC
7691
7692@item Using decorations
7693@cindex Using decorations
7694Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
7695itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
7696declared as:
7697
7698@example
7699__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
7700__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
7701@end example
7702
7703All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
7704any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
7705this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
7706the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7707
7708Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
c0065db7 7709decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
0a5d968e
NC
7710instead:
7711
7712@example
7713__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
7714__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
7715@end example
7716
c0065db7
RM
7717This complicates the structure of library header files, because
7718when included by the library itself the header must declare the
0a5d968e
NC
7719variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
7720code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
c0065db7 7721of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
0a5d968e
NC
7722omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
7723@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
b45619c0 7724information.
c0065db7 7725@end table
dc8465bf 7726
2ca22b03
NC
7727@cindex automatic data imports
7728@item automatic data imports
7729The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
69da35b5 7730by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
2ca22b03 7731compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
c0065db7 7732issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
69da35b5 7733code to these platforms, especially for large
2ca22b03 7734c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
c0065db7 7735initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
b45619c0 7736decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
c0065db7 7737platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
69da35b5
NC
7738command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
7739The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
7740suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
7741trigger the feature's use.
7742
c0065db7 7743auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
69da35b5
NC
7744additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
7745
c0065db7 7746"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
69da35b5
NC
7747documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
7748
c0065db7
RM
7749The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
7750occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
7751One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
69da35b5
NC
7752below.
7753
7754@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
c0065db7
RM
7755For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
7756object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
7757offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
7758field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
7759in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
69da35b5 7760without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
c0065db7 7761The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
69da35b5
NC
7762references.
7763
c0065db7
RM
7764The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
7765be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
7766themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
7767runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
7768compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
7769support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
69da35b5
NC
7770run without error on an older system.
7771
c0065db7
RM
7772@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
7773enabled as needed.
2ca22b03
NC
7774
7775@cindex direct linking to a dll
7776@item direct linking to a dll
7777The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
7778including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
69da35b5 7779libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
b45619c0 7780traditional import library method, especially when linking large
c0065db7
RM
7781libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
7782function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
7783though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
69da35b5 7784storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
c0065db7 7785tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
69da35b5
NC
7786large or complex libraries when using import libs.
7787
c0065db7 7788Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
69da35b5 7789@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
c0065db7 7790of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
69da35b5
NC
7791perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
7792select the dll instead of an import library.
7793
2ca22b03 7794
69da35b5
NC
7795For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
7796to find, in the first directory of its search path,
2ca22b03
NC
7797
7798@example
45e948fe
NC
7799libxxx.dll.a
7800xxx.dll.a
7801libxxx.a
7802xxx.lib
69da35b5 7803cygxxx.dll (*)
45e948fe
NC
7804libxxx.dll
7805xxx.dll
2ca22b03
NC
7806@end example
7807
69da35b5
NC
7808before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
7809
c0065db7
RM
7810(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
7811where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
7812@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
7813file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
69da35b5
NC
7814@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
7815
c0065db7
RM
7816Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
7817@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
69da35b5
NC
7818was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
7819various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
7820could coexist on the same machine.
7821
2ca22b03
NC
7822The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
7823applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
69da35b5 7824libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
2ca22b03
NC
7825
7826@example
7827bin/
7828 cygxxx.dll
7829lib/
7830 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
c0065db7 7831 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
2ca22b03
NC
7832@end example
7833
c0065db7
RM
7834Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
7835done two ways:
2ca22b03
NC
7836
78371. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
7838@example
7839gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7840@end example
2ca22b03 7841
69da35b5
NC
7842However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
7843(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
7844@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
7845not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
7846
2ca22b03
NC
78472. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
7848directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
7849should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
7850making the app/dll.
7851
7852@example
7853ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
c0065db7 7854@end example
2ca22b03
NC
7855
7856Then you can link without any make environment changes.
7857
7858@example
7859gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7860@end example
69da35b5
NC
7861
7862This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
7863perfectly legal
7864
7865@example
7866bin/
7867 cygxxx-5.dll
7868lib/
c0065db7 7869 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
69da35b5
NC
7870@end example
7871
dc8465bf 7872Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
69da35b5
NC
7873even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
7874@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
7875
7876Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
45e948fe 7877wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
69da35b5
NC
7878
78791. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
7880work with auto-imported data.
7881
dc8465bf
NC
78822. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
7883import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
7884symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
7885for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
7886possible to do this without an import lib.
69da35b5 7887
45e948fe
NC
78883. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
7889critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
7890in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
7891stdcall-decorated assembly names.
7892
69da35b5 7893So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
c0065db7
RM
7894true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
7895a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
7896binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
69da35b5
NC
7897massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
7898requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
7899will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
dc8465bf 7900
c0065db7 7901@item symbol aliasing
dc8465bf 7902@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7903@item adding additional names
7904Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
dc8465bf
NC
7905A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
7906exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
7907when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
c0065db7 7908import library. Consider the following DEF file:
dc8465bf 7909
c0065db7 7910@example
dc8465bf
NC
7911LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7912
7913EXPORTS
c0065db7 7914foo
dc8465bf 7915_foo = foo
c0065db7 7916@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7917
7918The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
7919
7920Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
7921source code using the "weak" attribute:
7922
c0065db7
RM
7923@example
7924void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
dc8465bf 7925void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
c0065db7 7926@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7927
7928See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
7929symbols.
7930
7931@item renaming symbols
7932Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
c0065db7 7933kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
dc8465bf
NC
7934@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
7935DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
c0065db7 7936created). In the following example:
dc8465bf 7937
c0065db7 7938@example
dc8465bf
NC
7939LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7940
7941EXPORTS
7942_foo = foo
c0065db7 7943@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7944
7945The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
7946@samp{_foo}.
c0065db7 7947@end table
dc8465bf 7948
0a5d968e 7949Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
c0065db7 7950unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
0a5d968e 7951If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
c0065db7
RM
7952@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
7953that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
7954@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
7955renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
7956to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
7957the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
7958In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
0a5d968e 7959which is probably not what you wanted.
c87db184
CF
7960
7961@cindex weak externals
7962@item weak externals
7963The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
7964weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
7965defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
7966are three variants of weak externals:
7967@itemize
7968@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
7969called lazy externals.
7970@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
7971This form is not presently implemented.
7972@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
7973implemented.
7974@end itemize
7975As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
7976are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
7977uses a default value.
c1711530
DK
7978
7979@cindex aligned common symbols
7980@item aligned common symbols
7981As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
7982desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
7983the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
7984carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
7985by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
7986tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
7987but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
7988warnings about unknown linker directives.
5063daf7 7989
2ca22b03
NC
7990@end table
7991
7992@ifclear GENERIC
7993@lowersections
7994@end ifclear
7995@end ifset
7996
e0001a05
NC
7997@ifset XTENSA
7998@ifclear GENERIC
7999@raisesections
8000@end ifclear
8001
8002@node Xtensa
8003@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
8004
8005@cindex Xtensa processors
8006The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
8007@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
8008specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
8009keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
8010example, with the command:
8011
8012@smallexample
8013SECTIONS
8014@{
8015 .text : @{
8016 *(.literal .text)
8017 @}
8018@}
8019@end smallexample
8020
8021@noindent
8022@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
8023and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
8024literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
8025interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
8026group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
8027files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
8028and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
e0001a05 8029
43cd72b9 8030@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
e0001a05 8031@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
43cd72b9
BW
8032Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
8033provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
8034is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
8035literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
8036will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
8037location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
8038the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
8039unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
8040@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
8041range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
8042
8043For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
8044to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
8045instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
8046instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
8047instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
8048@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
8049hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
8050By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
8051switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
8052density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
8053instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
8054performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
8055linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
8056a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
8057
8058The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
8059control the linker:
8060
8061@cindex Xtensa options
8062@table @option
43cd72b9
BW
8063@item --size-opt
8064When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
8065more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
8066no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
8067alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
8068preserve the correctness of the code.
8069@end table
e0001a05
NC
8070
8071@ifclear GENERIC
8072@lowersections
8073@end ifclear
8074@end ifset
8075
252b5132
RH
8076@ifclear SingleFormat
8077@node BFD
8078@chapter BFD
8079
8080@cindex back end
8081@cindex object file management
8082@cindex object formats available
8083@kindex objdump -i
8084The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
8085These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
8086object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
8087format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
8088it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
8089associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
8090object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
8091(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
8092list all the formats available for your configuration.
8093
8094@cindex BFD requirements
8095@cindex requirements for BFD
8096As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
8097several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
8098BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
8099formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
8100been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
8101BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
8102may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
8103
8104One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
8105mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
8106useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
8107conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
8108
8109@menu
8110* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
8111@end menu
8112
8113@node BFD outline
36f63dca 8114@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
252b5132
RH
8115@cindex opening object files
8116@include bfdsumm.texi
8117@end ifclear
8118
8119@node Reporting Bugs
8120@chapter Reporting Bugs
ff5dcc92
SC
8121@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
8122@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
252b5132 8123
ff5dcc92 8124Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
252b5132
RH
8125
8126Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
8127it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
ff5dcc92 8128to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
252b5132 8129work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
ff5dcc92 8130@command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
8131
8132In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
8133information that enables us to fix the bug.
8134
8135@menu
8136* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
8137* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
8138@end menu
8139
8140@node Bug Criteria
36f63dca 8141@section Have You Found a Bug?
252b5132
RH
8142@cindex bug criteria
8143
8144If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
8145
8146@itemize @bullet
8147@cindex fatal signal
8148@cindex linker crash
8149@cindex crash of linker
8150@item
8151If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
ff5dcc92 8152@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
252b5132
RH
8153
8154@cindex error on valid input
8155@item
ff5dcc92 8156If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
252b5132
RH
8157
8158@cindex invalid input
8159@item
ff5dcc92 8160If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
252b5132
RH
8161may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
8162object files are correct.
8163
8164@item
8165If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
ff5dcc92 8166improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
252b5132
RH
8167@end itemize
8168
8169@node Bug Reporting
36f63dca 8170@section How to Report Bugs
252b5132 8171@cindex bug reports
ff5dcc92 8172@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
252b5132
RH
8173
8174A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
ff5dcc92 8175products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
252b5132
RH
8176recommend you contact that organization first.
8177
8178You can find contact information for many support companies and
8179individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
8180distribution.
8181
ad22bfe8 8182@ifset BUGURL
ff5dcc92 8183Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
ad22bfe8
JM
8184@value{BUGURL}.
8185@end ifset
252b5132
RH
8186
8187The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
8188@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
8189fact or leave it out, state it!
8190
8191Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
8192problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
b553b183
NC
8193assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
8194matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
8195the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
8196location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
8197were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
8198into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
8199specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
c0065db7 8200and the most helpful.
b553b183
NC
8201
8202Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
8203the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
8204on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
252b5132
RH
8205
8206Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
36f63dca
NC
8207bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
8208respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
8209You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
252b5132
RH
8210
8211To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
8212
8213@itemize @bullet
8214@item
ff5dcc92 8215The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
252b5132
RH
8216the @samp{--version} argument.
8217
8218Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
ff5dcc92 8219the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
8220
8221@item
ff5dcc92 8222Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
252b5132
RH
8223patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
8224
8225@item
8226The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
8227version number.
8228
8229@item
ff5dcc92 8230What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
252b5132
RH
8231``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
8232
8233@item
8234The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
8235observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
8236list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
8237sufficient.
8238
8239If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
8240and then we might not encounter the bug.
8241
8242@item
8243A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
b553b183
NC
8244bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
8245provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
8246bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
8247state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
8248requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
8249we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
8250attachments are best.
252b5132
RH
8251
8252If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
8253@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
8254object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
8255@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
8256how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
8257
8258@item
8259A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8260incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8261
ff5dcc92 8262Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
252b5132
RH
8263will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
8264not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
8265a chance to make a mistake.
8266
8267Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
8268say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
b45619c0 8269copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
252b5132
RH
8270C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
8271and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
8272fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
8273you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
8274any conclusion from our observations.
8275
8276@item
ff5dcc92 8277If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
252b5132
RH
8278diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
8279@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
ff5dcc92 8280If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
252b5132
RH
8281context, not by line number.
8282
8283The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8284sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8285@end itemize
8286
8287Here are some things that are not necessary:
8288
8289@itemize @bullet
8290@item
8291A description of the envelope of the bug.
8292
8293Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8294which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8295changes will not affect it.
8296
8297This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8298will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8299with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8300We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8301
8302Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8303of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8304output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8305less time, and so on.
8306
8307However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8308report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8309
8310@item
8311A patch for the bug.
8312
8313A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8314the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8315a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8316to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8317
ff5dcc92 8318Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
252b5132
RH
8319construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
8320through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
8321able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
8322fixed.
8323
8324And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8325patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8326help us to understand.
8327
8328@item
8329A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8330
8331Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8332things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8333@end itemize
8334
8335@node MRI
8336@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
8337@cindex MRI compatibility
ff5dcc92
SC
8338To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
8339linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
252b5132
RH
8340alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
8341described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
8342simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
ff5dcc92 8343@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
252b5132
RH
8344linker commands; these commands are described here.
8345
8346In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
8347file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
8348features to make use of them.
8349
8350You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
8351@samp{-c} command-line option.
8352
8353Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
8354command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
8355blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
ff5dcc92 8356MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8357issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
8358
8359Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
8360
8361You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
8362lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
8363The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
8364
8365@table @code
8366@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
8367@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
8368@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8369Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
252b5132
RH
8370the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
8371@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
8372your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
8373script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
8374commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
8375input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
8376@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
8377
8378@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
8379@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
8380Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
8381in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
8382
8383@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
8384
8385@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
8386@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
8387Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8388@var{expression} should be a power of two.
8389
8390@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8391@item BASE @var{expression}
8392Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8393absolute addresses) in the output file.
8394
8395@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8396@item CHIP @var{expression}
8397@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8398This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8399
8400@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8401@item END
8402This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8403
8404@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8405@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8406Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
a1ab1d2a 8407language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
252b5132
RH
8408
8409@enumerate
a1ab1d2a 8410@item
252b5132
RH
8411S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
8412
8413@item
8414IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
8415
8416@item
8417COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
8418@samp{COFF}
8419@end enumerate
8420
8421@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8422@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8423Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
ff5dcc92 8424@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
252b5132
RH
8425
8426The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8427same line, with no change in its effect.
8428
8429@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8430@item LOAD @var{filename}
8431@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8432Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
ff5dcc92 8433same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8434command line.
8435
8436@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8437@item NAME @var{output-name}
ff5dcc92 8438@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
252b5132
RH
8439MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8440option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8441
8442@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8443@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8444@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8445Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
252b5132
RH
8446order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8447script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8448sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8449file, in the order specified.
8450
8451@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8452@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8453@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8454@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8455Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8456@var{name} used in the linker input files.
8457
8458@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8459@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8460@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8461@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8462You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8463specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8464If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8465@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8466@end table
8467
793c5807
NC
8468@node GNU Free Documentation License
8469@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
36f63dca 8470@include fdl.texi
704c465c 8471
370b66a1
CD
8472@node LD Index
8473@unnumbered LD Index
252b5132
RH
8474
8475@printindex cp
8476
8477@tex
7ca01ed9 8478% I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
252b5132
RH
8479% meantime:
8480\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8481\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8482\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8483\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8484\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8485\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8486\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8487\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8488\page\colophon
7ca01ed9 8489% Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
252b5132
RH
8490@end tex
8491
252b5132 8492@bye